WO2002042273A2 - Acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors - Google Patents

Acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2002042273A2
WO2002042273A2 PCT/US2001/046884 US0146884W WO0242273A2 WO 2002042273 A2 WO2002042273 A2 WO 2002042273A2 US 0146884 W US0146884 W US 0146884W WO 0242273 A2 WO0242273 A2 WO 0242273A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
substituted
hydrogen
alkenyl
compound
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2001/046884
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2002042273A3 (en
Inventor
Gregory S. Bisacchi
James C. Sutton, Jr.
William A. Slusarchyk
Uwe D. Treuner
Guohua Zhao
Daniel L. Cheney
Shung C. Wu
Yan Shi
Original Assignee
Bristol-Myers Squibb Company
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Bristol-Myers Squibb Company filed Critical Bristol-Myers Squibb Company
Priority to AU2002227269A priority Critical patent/AU2002227269A1/en
Priority to JP2002544409A priority patent/JP2004514669A/en
Priority to HU0400651A priority patent/HUP0400651A2/en
Priority to CA002428191A priority patent/CA2428191A1/en
Priority to EP01996145A priority patent/EP1332131A2/en
Publication of WO2002042273A2 publication Critical patent/WO2002042273A2/en
Publication of WO2002042273A3 publication Critical patent/WO2002042273A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00—Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06—Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/18—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for pancreatic disorders, e.g. pancreatic enzymes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/02—Nasal agents, e.g. decongestants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/02—Drugs for dermatological disorders for treating wounds, ulcers, burns, scars, keloids, or the like
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06—Antipsoriatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A61P21/04—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system for myasthenia gravis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/08—Antiallergic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/02—Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/04—Inotropic agents, i.e. stimulants of cardiac contraction; Drugs for heart failure
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C257/00—Compounds containing carboxyl groups, the doubly-bound oxygen atom of a carboxyl group being replaced by a doubly-bound nitrogen atom, this nitrogen atom not being further bound to an oxygen atom, e.g. imino-ethers, amidines
    • C07C257/10—Compounds containing carboxyl groups, the doubly-bound oxygen atom of a carboxyl group being replaced by a doubly-bound nitrogen atom, this nitrogen atom not being further bound to an oxygen atom, e.g. imino-ethers, amidines with replacement of the other oxygen atom of the carboxyl group by nitrogen atoms, e.g. amidines
    • C07C257/18—Compounds containing carboxyl groups, the doubly-bound oxygen atom of a carboxyl group being replaced by a doubly-bound nitrogen atom, this nitrogen atom not being further bound to an oxygen atom, e.g. imino-ethers, amidines with replacement of the other oxygen atom of the carboxyl group by nitrogen atoms, e.g. amidines having carbon atoms of amidino groups bound to carbon atoms of six-membered aromatic rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D207/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D207/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D207/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D207/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D207/16—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D211/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D211/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D211/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D211/36—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D211/60—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D223/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D223/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings
    • C07D223/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing seven-membered rings having one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom not condensed with other rings with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07B—GENERAL METHODS OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY; APPARATUS THEREFOR
    • C07B2200/00—Indexing scheme relating to specific properties of organic compounds
    • C07B2200/07—Optical isomers

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to acid derivatives that are inhibitors of serine proteases such as Factor Nlla, Factor LXa, Factor Xa, Factor FXIa, tryptase, and urokinase. These acid derivatives are useful as anticoagulants in treating and preventing cardiovascular diseases, as anti-inflammatory agents, and as metastasis inhibitors in treating cancer.
  • thrombin is a proteolytic enzyme that occupies a central position in the coagulation process. Thrombin catalyzes the conversion of fibrinogen to fibrin, is a key effector enzyme for blood clotting, and also is pivotal for other functions, such as activation of helper proteins (including Factors N and N ⁇ i and thrombomodulin), and its own activation.
  • helper proteins including Factors N and N ⁇ i and thrombomodulin
  • thrombotic diseases Disturbances in the natural balance between pro- and anti-coagulant forces may result in bleeding or thrombotic diseases.
  • the series of reactions leading to thrombin production involve a number of coagulation factors present in the blood as precursors (e.g., Factors N ⁇ - XII).
  • the coagulation factors are transformed into activated factors (e.g., Factors Vila, LXa, Xa, XIa, etc.).
  • Factor Nil forms a complex with a membrane protein called tissue factor, to which Factor NLIa tightly binds.
  • tissue factor to which Factor NLIa tightly binds.
  • Factor NLIa is present as a complex bound to tissue factor.
  • the coagulation factors and tissue factor complexes undergo an ordered chain of reactions that ultimately lead to conversion of Factor X to Factor Xa, and Factor Xa catalyzes the conversion of prothrombin to thrombin.
  • An elevated plasma level of coagulation factors is a risk factor for fatal myocardial infarction and associated with coronary artery disease and other abnormalities of the coagulation system, e.g., thrombosis, ischemic vascular disease, intravascular clotting, stroke, embolisms, and so forth.
  • antithrombotic agents have been researched and developed for use in treating cardiovascular and other diseases.
  • Presently established antithrombotic agents include heparin, coumarin, and aspirin, among others. There are, however, limitations with these agents. For example, both heparin and coumarin have a highly-variable dose-related response, and their anticoagulant effects must be closely monitored to avoid a risk of serious bleeding.
  • the present invention provides acid-based compounds useful as inhibitors of Factor Vila, Factor LXa, Factor Xa, Factor FXIa, tryptase, and urokinase. Summary of the Invention
  • Acid derivatives are provided that are inhibitors of serine proteases having the Formula I:
  • W is selected from C 2 -ioalkyl, C 2 - ⁇ oalkenyl, substituted C 2 . ⁇ oalkyl, substituted C 2 -
  • ring B is phenyl or pyridyl
  • X 2 is N, CH, or C, provided that X 2 is C when Ri and R 2 join to form a fully unsaturated ring;
  • L is ⁇ (CR ⁇ 8 R 19 ) s -Y-(CR 18a R ⁇ 9a )t;
  • Z is a 5 to 7-membered monocyclic or 8 to 11-membered bicyclic aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, or cycloalkyl, wherein each Z group is optionally substituted with up to two R 2 o and/or up to one R 21 , except Z is not phenyl substituted with phenyloxy when W is methoxy, s is 0 and Y is -CH 2 -CH -; Ri and R 2 (i) are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, heteroaryl, aryl, heterocyclo, and cycloalkyl; or (ii) are taken together to form an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclo, provided that Ri and R 2 do not together form pyrazole when W is methoxy and Z is
  • the compounds of this invention are smprisingly selective inhibitors of serine proteases.
  • certain selections for the groups "Z-L-" in formula I provide compounds which are particularly selective for inhibition of one or more serine proteases versus other proteases.
  • Z-L- is selected from:
  • compounds of formula I are particularly selective for inhibition of FVLIa.
  • compositions for treating a serine protease disease, an inflammatory or immune condition, or cancer comprising at least one compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • methods of treating such diseases comprising administering to a mammal in need of such treatment at least one compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof.
  • compositions for use as anticoagulants during the preparation, use, storage, or fractionation of blood and methods of maintaining blood in the fluid phase during its preparation, use, storage, or fractionation.
  • alkyl refers to straight or branched chain hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Lower alkyl groups, that is, alkyl groups of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, are most preferred.
  • C j.6 alkyl refers to straight and branched chain alkyl groups with one to six carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, t- butyl, n-pentyl, and so forth.
  • R' and R" may together form a heterocyclo or heteroaryl ring.
  • a substituted alkyl includes an aryl, heterocyclo, cycloalkyl, or heteroaryl substituent
  • said ringed systems are as defined below and thus may have zero, one, two, or three substituents, also as defined below.
  • alkyl when used in conjunction with another group, e.g., arylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, etc., the term defines with more specificity a particular substituent that a substituted alkyl will contain.
  • arylalkyl refers to a substituted alkyl group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms and at least one aryl substituent
  • lower arylalkyl refers to substituted alkyl groups having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and at least one aryl substituent.
  • alkenyl refers to straight or branched chain hydrocarbon groups having 2 to 12 carbon atoms and at least one double bond. Alkenyl groups of 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having one double bond are most preferred.
  • alkynyl refers to straight or branched chain hydrocarbon groups having 2 to 12 carbon atoms and at least one triple bond. Alkynyl groups of 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having one triple bond are most preferred.
  • alkylene refers to bivalent straight or branched chain hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, e.g., ⁇ -CH 2 - ⁇ n , wherein n is 1 to 12, preferably 1-8. Lower alkylene groups, that is, alkylene groups of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, are most preferred.
  • alkenylene and alkynylene refer to bivalent radicals of alkenyl and alknyl groups, respectively, as defined above. When reference is made to a substituted alkylene, alkenylene, or alkynylene group, these groups are substituted with one to three substitutents as defined above for alkyl groups.
  • a ringed substituent of an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkylene, alkenylene, or alkynylene may be joined at a terminal atom or an available intermediate (branch or chain) atom and thus may comprise, for example, the groups
  • alkoxy refers to an alkyl group as defined above having one, two or three oxygen atoms (-O-) in the alkyl chain.
  • alkoxy includes the groups -O-C ⁇ _ 12 alkyl, -Ci- ⁇ alkylene-O- -ealkyl, -C ⁇ - 4 alkylene-O-Ci- 4 alkylene-O-Ci- 4 alkyl, O-C ⁇ alkylene-O-C ⁇ alkylene-O-C j ⁇ alkyl, and so forth.
  • alkylthio refers to an alkyl group as defined above bonded through one or more sulfur (-S-) atoms.
  • alkylthio includes the groups -S-Cj. jj alkyl, -S 1.6 alkylene-S-C 1.6 alkyl, etc.
  • alkylamino refers to an alkyl group as defined above bonded through one or more nitrogen (-NR-) groups.
  • alkylamino refers to straight and branched chain groups and thus, for example, includes the groups -NH(C j _ 12 alk l) and -N(C w alkyl) z
  • monovalent C j.2 alkylamino includes the groups -
  • a lower alkylamino comprises an alkylamino having from one to four carbon atoms.
  • the carbon atoms of said groups are substituted with one to three substituents as defined above for alkyl groups.
  • the carbon and/or nitrogen atoms of these groups are substituted with one to three substitutents appropriately selected from the group of substituents recited above for alkyl groups.
  • the alkoxy, alkylthio, or alkylamino groups may be monovalent or bivalent.
  • a monovalent alkoxy includes groups such as - O-C j. ⁇ alkyl and -C 1 _ 6 alkylene-O-C 1 _ 6 alkyl
  • a bivalent alkoxy includes groups such as -O-C 1 12 alkylene- and -C ⁇ g alkylene-O-C ⁇ g alkylene-, etc.
  • heteroalkyl is used herein to refer saturated and unsaturated straight or branched chain hydrocarbon groups having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms, wherein one, two or three carbon atoms in the straight chain are replaced by a heteroatom (O, S or N).
  • heteroalkyl includes alkoxy, alkylthio, and alkylamino groups, as defined above, as well as alkyl groups having a combination of heteroatoms selected from O, S, or N.
  • heteroalkyl herein may be monovalent or bivalent, and for example, may comprise the groups -O- (CH 2 ) 2 -5NH-(CH 2 )2- or -O-(CH 2 )2- 5 NH-CH 3 , etc.
  • a "substituted heteroalkyl” has one to three substituents appropriately selected from those recited above for alkyl groups.
  • acyl refers to a carbonyl group ( p ) linked to an organic radical including an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, or substituted alkynyl group, as defined above.
  • alkoxycarbonyl refers to a carboxy or ester group ( — c ° ) linked to an organic radical including an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, or substituted alkynyl group, as defined above.
  • halo or halogen refers to chloro, bromo, fiuoro and iodo.
  • haloalkyl means an alkyl having one or more halo substituents, e.g., including trifluoromethyl.
  • haloalkoxy means an alkoxy group having one or more halo substituents.
  • haloalkoxy includes -OCF 3 .
  • sulfonyl refers to a sulphoxide group (i.e., -S(O) 1 . 2 -) linked to an organic radical including an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, or substituted alkynyl group, as defined above.
  • the organic radical to which the sulphoxide group is attached may be monovalent (e.g., -SO 2 -alkyl), or bivalent
  • sulfonamide refers to the group -S(O) 2 NR'R", wherein R' and R" may be hydrogen or alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, or substituted alkynyl, as defined above. R' and R" may be monovalent or bivalent (e.g., -SO 2 -NH-alkylene, etc.)
  • aryl refers to phenyl, biphenyl, 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl, with phenyl being preferred.
  • said ring may in turn be substituted with one to three of halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, alkylamino, phenyl, benzyl, phenyloxy, and benzyloxy.
  • cycloalkyl refers to fully saturated and partially unsaturated hydrocarbon rings of 3 to 9, preferably 3 to 7 carbon atoms.
  • a cycloalkyl When a cycloalkyl is substituted with a further ring, said ring may in turn be substituted with one to three of halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, alkylamino, phenyl, benzyl, phenyloxy, and benzyloxy.
  • heterocyclo refers to substituted and unsubstituted non-aromatic 3 to 7 membered monocyclic groups, 7 to 11 membered bicyclic groups, and ' 10 to 15 membered tricyclic groups which have at least one heteroatom (O, S or N) in at least one of the rings.
  • Each ring of the heterocyclo group containing a heteroatom can contain one or two oxygen or sulfur atoms and/or from one to four nitrogen atoms, provided that the total number of heteroatoms in each ring is four or less, and further provided that the ring contains at least one carbon atom.
  • the fused rings completing the bicyclic and tricyclic groups may contain only carbon atoms and may be saturated, partially saturated, or unsaturated.
  • the nitrogen and sulfur atoms may optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen atoms may optionally be quaternized.
  • the heterocyclo group may be attached at any available nitrogen or carbon atom.
  • a heterocyclo When a heterocyclo is substituted with a further ring, said ring may in turn be substituted with one to three of halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, alkylamino, phenyl, benzyl, phenyloxy, and benzyloxy.
  • Exemplary monocyclic groups include azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, oxetanyl, imidazolinyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, 2-oxopiperazinyl, 2-oxopiperidinyl, 2- oxopyrrolodinyl, 2-oxoazepinyl, azepinyl, 4-piperidonyl, tetrahydropyranyl, mo ⁇ holinyl, thiamoipholinyl, thiamo ⁇ holinyl sulfoxide, thiamo ⁇ holinyl sulfone, 1,3-dioxolane and tetrahydro-lJ-dioxothienyl and the like.
  • Exemplary bicyclic heterocyclo groups include quinuclidinyl.
  • heteroaryl refers to substituted and unsubstituted aromatic 5 or 6 membered monocyclic groups, 9 or 10 membered bicyclic groups, and 11 to 14 membered tricyclic groups which have at least one heteroatom (O, S or N) in at least one of the rings.
  • Each ring of the heteroaryl group containing a heteroatom can contain one or two oxygen or sulfur atoms and/or from one to four nitrogen atoms provided that the total number of heteroatoms in each ring is four or less and each ring has at least one carbon atom.
  • the fused rings completing the bicyclic and tricyclic groups may contain only carbon atoms and may be saturated, partially saturated, or unsaturated.
  • the nitrogen and sulfur atoms may optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen atoms may optionally be quaternized.
  • Heteroaryl groups which are bicyclic or tricyclic must include at least one fully aromatic ring but the other fused ring or rings may be aromatic or non-aromatic.
  • the heteroaryl group may be attached at any available nitrogen or carbon atom of any ring.
  • a heteroaryl When a heteroaryl is substituted with a further ring, said ring may in turn be substituted with one to three of halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, alkylamino, phenyl, benzyl, phenyloxy, and benzyloxy.
  • Exemplary monocyclic heteroaryl groups include pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, isothiazolyl, furanyl, thienyl, oxadiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl and the like.
  • Exemplary bicyclic heteroaryl groups include indolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzodioxolyl, benzoxaxolyl, benzothienyl, quinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzopyranyl, indolizinyl, benzofuranyl, chromonyl, coumarinyl, benzopyranyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, indazolyl, pyrrolopyridyl, furopyridinyl, dihydroisoindolyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl and the like.
  • Exemplary tricyclic heteroaryl groups include carbazolyl, benzidolyl, phenanthrollinyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, xanthenyl and the like.
  • the term "carbocyclic” refers to optionally substituted aromatic or non- aromatic 3 to 7 membered monocyclic and 7 to 11 membered bicyclic groups, in which all atoms of the ring or rings are carbon atoms.
  • metal ion refers to alkali metal ions such as sodium, potassium or lithium and alkaline earth metal ions such as magnesium and calcium, as well as zinc and aluminum.
  • H rl2 bond appearing as a dash as in ⁇ "C — C j t should be understood that such bonds may be selected from single or double bonds, as appropriate given the selections for adjacent atoms and bonds.
  • bonds linking Ri to X 2 and X 2 to C 6 are single bonds; and when X 2 is C, one of the bonds linking X 2 to an adjacent atom is a double bond, i.e., either a bond to R t or to C 6 is a double bond.
  • a linker such as a methylene group
  • linker group "L” is inserted into the formula I in the same direction set forth in the text.
  • L is recited as -CH 2 -Y-
  • the Y group is attached to the C 6 carbon atom i.e., to which X is
  • salts form salts which are also within the scope of this invention. Unless otherwise indicated, reference to an inventive compound is understood to include reference to salts thereof.
  • the term “salt(s)” denotes acidic and/or basic salts formed with inorganic and/or organic acids and bases.
  • the term “salt(s) may include zwitterions (inner salts), e.g., when a compound of formula I contains both a basic moiety, such as an amine or a pyridine or imidazole ring, and an acidic moiety, such as a carboxylic acid.
  • Salts of the compounds of the formula I may be formed, for example, by reacting a compound of the formula I with an amount of acid or base, such as an equivalent amount, in a medium such as one in which the salt precipitates or in an aqueous medium followed by lyophilization.
  • Exemplary acid addition salts include acetates (such as those formed with acetic acid or trihaloacetic acid, for example, trifluoroacetic acid), adipates, alginates, ascorbates, aspartates, benzoates, benzenesulfonates, bisulfates, borates, butyrates, citrates, camphorates, camphorsulfonates, cyclopentanepropionates, digluconates, dodecylsulfates, ethanesulfonates, fumarates, glucoheptanoates, glycerophosphates, hemisulfates, heptanoates, hexanoates, hydrochlorides (formed with hydrochloric acid), hydrobromides (formed with hydrogen bromide), hydroiodides, 2- hydroxyethanesulfonates, lactates, maleates (formed with maleic acid), methanesulfonates (formed with methanesul
  • Exemplary basic salts include ammonium salts, alkali metal salts such as sodium, lithium, and potassium salts; alkaline earth metal salts such as calcium and magnesium salts; barium, zinc, and aluminum salts; salts with organic bases (for example, organic amines) such as trialkylamines such as triethylamine, procaine, dibenzylamine, N-benzyl- ⁇ -phenethylamine, 1-ephenamine, N,N'-dibenzylethylene- diamine, dehydroabietylamine, N-ethylpiperidine, benzylamine, dicyclohexylamine or similar pharmaceutically acceptable amines and salts with amino acids such as arginine, lysine and the like.
  • organic bases for example, organic amines
  • trialkylamines such as triethylamine, procaine, dibenzylamine, N-benzyl- ⁇ -phenethylamine, 1-ephenamine, N,N'-d
  • Basic nitrogen-containing groups may be quaternized with agents such as lower alkyl halides (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), dialkyl sulfates (e.g., dimethyl, diethyl, dibutyl, and diamyl sulfates), long chain halides (e.g., decyl, lauryl, myristyl and stearyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), aralkyl halides (e.g., benzyl and phenethyl bromides), and others.
  • Preferred salts include monohydrochloride, hydrogensulfate, methanesulfonate, phosphate or nitrate.
  • Prodrags and solvates of the inventive compounds are also contemplated.
  • the term "prodrug” denotes a compound which, upon administration to a subject, undergoes chemical conversion by metabolic or chemical processes to yield a compound of the formula I, and/or a salt and/or solvate thereof.
  • Various forms of prodrags are well known in the art. For examples of such prodrug derivatives, see: a) Design of Prodrugs. edited by H. Bundgaard, (Elsevier, 1985) and Methods in Enzymology, Nol.42, p. 309-396, edited by K. Widder, et al.
  • prodrags comprise compounds wherein the upper ring substituent -CO R 3 is a group that will hydrolyze in the body to compounds where said substituent is -CO 2 H.
  • prodrugs are preferably administered orally since hydrolysis in many instances occurs principally under the influence of the digestive enzymes. Parenteral administration may be used where the ester per se is active, or in those instances where hydrolysis occurs in the blood.
  • physiologically hydrolyzable esters of compounds of formula I include C h alky-benzyl, 4-methoxybenzyl, indanyl, phthalyl, methoxymethyl, C ⁇ g alkanoyloxy-C ⁇ g alkyl, e.g. acetoxymethyl, pivaloyloxymethyl or propionyloxymethyl, C ⁇ g alkoxycarbonyloxy-C ⁇ g alkyl, e.g.
  • esters used, for example, in the penicillin and cephalosporin arts. Such esters may be prepared by conventional techniques known in the art.
  • inventive compounds may exist in their tautomeric form, in which hydrogen atoms are transposed to other parts of the molecules and the chemical bonds between the atoms of the molecules are consequently rearranged. It should be understood that the all tautomeric forms, insofar as they may exist, are included within the invention. Additionally, inventive compounds may have trans and cis isomers and may contain one or more chiral centers, therefore existing in enantiomeric and diastereomeric forms. The invention includes all such isomers, as well as mixtures of cis and trans isomers, mixtures of diastereomers and racemic mixtures of enantiomers (optical isomers).
  • any one of the isomers or a mixture of more than one isomer is intended.
  • the processes for preparation can use racemates, enantiomers or diastereomers as starting " materials.
  • enantiomeric or diastereomeric products are prepared, they can be separated by conventional methods for example, chromatographic or fractional crystallization.
  • the compounds of the instant invention may, for example, be in the free or hydrate form, and may be obtained by methods exemplified by the following descriptions.
  • X 2 is N, CH, or C, provided that X 2 is C when Ri and R 2 join to form a fully unsaturated ring;
  • L is -(CH 2 ) S -Y-;
  • Ri and R 2 are independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl and arylalkyl; or (ii) are taken together to form an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclo; wherein when Ri and R 2 individually or together form a heteroaryl, aryl, heterocyclo or cycloalkyl, said cyclic group is optionally substituted with up to two R 26 ;
  • R- t is hydrogen or lower alkyl
  • R 5 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, heterocyclo or heteroaryl;
  • R 6 is selected from C ⁇ - 6 alkyl, more preferably C 2 - 6 alkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;
  • R 3 o at each occurrence is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkyl, and phenyl;
  • R 3 ⁇ and R 32 at each occurrence are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, and cycloalkyl; m and n are independently 0, 1 or 2; and s is 0, 1 or 2.
  • More preferred compounds are those compounds having the formulae:
  • X 3 is CH or N
  • R 5 is Ci- 6 alkyl, -CH(CH 2 OH)C(CH 3 ) 3 , or C ⁇ - 2 alkyl substituted with C 5 - 6 cycloalkylene; either (a) s is 0 and Z is selected from
  • R26 s C 2 - 6 straight or branched alkenyl, -OR 0 or -NR 3 ⁇ R 32 , and R 27 is hydrogen, or R 26 and R 27 together form a fused benzo ring;
  • R 3 o is C1- 5 straight or branched chain alkyl, C 2 - 6 straight or branched alkenyl, C 3 -
  • R 3 ⁇ and R 2 are selected from hydrogen and lower alkyl.
  • Z is selected from:
  • R 5 is hydrogen or hydroxymethyl; and R 26 is C ⁇ - 3 alkoxy or NH(Ci- 4 alkyl).
  • the compounds of the invention may be prepared by the exemplary processes described in the following Schemes A through D. Methods for making intermediates including appropriately-protected amine-coupling components are shown in Schemes E through G and I through X, and Scheme H shows a method for making an unprotected amine-coupling component. These amines may be coupled to substrates to make compounds of formula I and deprotected, when necessary or desired, as shown in Schemes A-D and the Examples. Exemplary reagents and procedures for these reactions appear hereinafter and in the working Examples. Starting materials are commercially available or can be readily prepared by one of ordinary skill in the art as shown herein or as described in the literature. For all of the schemes, the groups Ri-R 2 , W, X, Z, r, s etc., are as described herein for a compound of formula I, unless otherwise indicated.
  • Compounds of formula la can be made by reacting acid 1 with an amine having the desired group Z, i.e., Z-NHR 13 .
  • the 2-position acid group is suitably protected (P'), and the reaction is carried out in the presence of coupling reagent(s) such as DCC/HOBT/DMAP, EDC/DMAP, or DIC/HOAT to afford the corresponding amide compound.
  • the group P' optionally may be deprotected to afford the compound of formula la wherein R 3 is hydrogen, or the group P' may be retained wherein P' comprises the desired group R 3 .
  • the group P' may be deprotected to afford the group CO 2 H, with the group CO 2 H then converted to another desired R 3 group.
  • the compound having the acid group CO 2 H may be reacted with a halide having the desired R 3 group, i.e., X-R 3 where X is Cl, Br, or I, in the presence of base, or the acid compound may be coupled with an alcohol such as R 3 OH in a coupling reagent. It may be necessary or desired to protect additional functional groups besides the 2-position acid before performing the coupling reaction, as one skilled in the field will appreciate. Those additional protecting groups can be removed after the coupling using appropriate deprotecting conditions. Preparation of acids 1 , wherein R ⁇ and R 2 together form an unsaturated carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring, is described in WO 99/041231, inco ⁇ orated herein by reference, and described in the Examples that appear hereinafter.
  • the aldehyde 2, wherein the 2-position acid group is suitably protected (P') can be coupled with an amine Z-NHR 13 in the presence of a reducing reagent such as sodium triacetoxyborohydride, to afford the corresponding amine compound having the group CO 2 P'.
  • a reducing reagent such as sodium triacetoxyborohydride
  • the compound of formula lb is provided, having the desired group R 3 .
  • Preparation of aldehydes 2, wherein Ri and R 2 together form an unsaturated carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring is described in WO 99/041231, inco ⁇ orated herein, and further shown in the Examples hereinafter.
  • Aryl fluoride 3a is reacted with amine 4 in DMSO in the presence of a base such as DLEA to afford intermediate 5.
  • a base such as DLEA
  • triflate 3b is reacted with amine 4 in the presence of a suitable palladium reagent to afford intermediate 5.
  • Selective deprotection of the P" group of compound 5 affords acid 6.
  • Acid 6 is reacted with an appropriate amine in the presence of suitable coupling reagents.
  • Compounds having the desired group R 3 are obtained as described in Scheme A, i.e., by optional deprotection, further reaction or coupling, to afford compounds of formula Lla, above.
  • Aryl fluoride 3a is reacted with amine 7 in DMSO in the presence of a base such as DLEA to afford compound 8, where Ri is defined as above except where Ri and R form a ring, the ring is a heterocyclo.
  • a base such as DLEA
  • Selective deprotection of the P" group affords acid 9.
  • Reaction of acid 9 with an amine Z-NHR ⁇ 3 in the presence of coupling reagent(s) such as DCC/HOBT/DMAP, EDC/DMAP, or DIC/HOAT affords the corresponding amide compound.
  • coupling reagent(s) such as DCC/HOBT/DMAP, EDC/DMAP, or DIC/HOAT affords the corresponding amide compound.
  • Compounds having the desired group R 3 are obtained as described in Scheme A, i.e., by optional deprotection, further reaction or coupling, to afford compounds of formula Lib, above.
  • Compound 10 was prepared according to J. Med. Chem., Vol. 42 (1999), at pp. 3510-3519, from 2-methyl-4-nitroaniline. A mixture of compound 10 and 1-(1,1- dimethylethoxy)-N,N, N', N'-tetramethyl-methanediamine in dry DMF (10 mL) was stirred at 70°C for 2h under N 2 . After cooling to rt, the reaction mixture was treated with hexane, and the solid was collected by filtration and washed with hexane to give compound JJ as black crystals. Compound ⁇ was converted to compound 13 in two alternate ways. In one approach, compound ⁇ was converted to 13 .
  • compound JJ was converted to 13 by first mixing compound JJ and 2,4-dimethoxylbenzylamine in DMF and stirring the mixture at 140°C for 3h. The solvent was removed by vacuum distillation and residue treated with EtOAc. The orange solid was collected by filtration and washed with hexane to give compound 12. To a solution of compound Y ⁇ in anisole was added TFA. The reaction mixture was stirred at 90°C for lh and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The residue was treated with sat'd NaHCO 3 (30 mL) and the product collected by filtration and washed with water to afford compound 13.
  • Compound 20 was synthesized from compound 19 following the procedure described in Osborn, et al., J.Chem. Soc. (1956), at 4191, and compounds 21_a and 21b were prepared according to Poradowska et al., Synthesis, (1975), at p. 732.
  • Compound 2 a and phthalic acid anhydride 22 were powdered and mixed well. Heating the mixture for 2 h at 130 to 150°C and finally 2 min to 220°C finished the reaction. The cooled solid material of crude compound 23 was powdered and washed with ether/DCM (10:1) and dried yielding compound 23 as a beige powder.
  • Nitro and carboxylic acid starting materials (e.g. 48) were dissolved in DCM and N.N-DMF (10:1). lJ'-carbonyldiimidazole (1.2 equiv) was added, and the reaction stirred at rt for 5 h. Ammonium hydroxide (2 equiv) was then added. After stirring overnight at rt, the reaction was concentrated, washed with base and extracted with EtOAc to yield compound 49. Compound 49 was then hydrogenated at 40 psi on the PARR shaker in the presence of Pd/C catalyst. Filtration and concentration yielded the appropriate Z-amine coupling s same or similar
  • the resulting compound 54 was dissolved in EtOAc and Pd/C catalyst was added. The mixture was placed on the PARR shaker at 40 psi for 2h. Filtering off the catalyst yielded the desired compound 55 in 80% yield.
  • the inventive compounds are inhibitors of the activated coagulation serine proteases known as Factor Vila, Factor LXa, Factor Xa, Factor Xla, and thrombin and also inhibit other serine proteases, such as trypsin, tryptase, and urokinase.
  • the compounds are useful for treating or preventing those processes, which involve the production or action of Factor NLIa, Factor LXa, Factor Xa, Factor Xla, thrombin, trypsin, and/or tryptase.
  • they are useful as metastasis inhibitors in treating cancer.
  • the term “treating” or “treatment” encompasses prevention, partial alleviation, or cure of the disease or disorder.
  • inventive compounds are useful in treating consequences of atherosclerotic plaque rupture including cardiovascular diseases associated with the activation of the coagulation cascade in thrombotic or thrombophilic states.
  • cardiovascular diseases associated with the activation of the coagulation cascade in thrombotic or thrombophilic states.
  • diseases include arterial thrombosis, coronary artery disease, acute coronary syndromes, myocardial infarction, unstable angina, ischemia resulting from vascular occlusion cerebral infarction, stroke and related cerebral vascular diseases (including cerebrovascular accident and transient ischemic attack).
  • the compounds are useful in treating or preventing formation of atherosclerotic plaques, transplant atherosclerosis, peripheral arterial disease and intermittent claudication.
  • the compounds can be used to prevent restenosis following arterial injury induced endogenously (by rapture of an atherosclerotic plaque), or exogenously (by invasive cardiological procedures such as vessel wall injury resulting from angioplasty).
  • inventive compounds are useful in preventing venous thrombosis, coagulation syndromes, deep vein thrombosis (DNT), disseminated intravascular coagulopathy, Kasabach-Merritt syndrome, pulmonary embolism, cerebral thrombosis, atrial fibrillation, and cerebral embolism.
  • DNT deep vein thrombosis
  • pulmonary embolism cerebral thrombosis
  • atrial fibrillation and cerebral embolism.
  • the compounds are useful in treating peripheral arterial occlusion, thromboembolic complications of surgery (such as hip replacement, endarterectomy, introduction of artificial heart valves, vascular grafts, and mechanical organs), implantation or transplantation of organ, tissue or cells, and thromboembolic complications of medications (such as oral contraceptives, hormone replacement, and heparin, e.g., for treating heparin-induced thrombocytopenia).
  • the inventive compounds are useful in preventing thrombosis associated with artificial heart valves, stents, and ventricular enlargement including dilated cardiac myopathy and heart failure.
  • the compounds are also useful in treating thrombosis due to confinement (i.e. immobilization, hospitalization, bed rest etc.).
  • These compounds are also useful in preventing thrombosis and complications in patients genetically predisposed to arterial thrombosis or venous thrombosis (including activated protein C resistance, FNieiden, Prothrombin 20210, elevated coagulation factors FNFI, FNHI, FLX, FX, FXI, prothrombin, TAFI and fibrinogen), elevated levels of homocystine, and deficient levels of antithrombin, protein C, and protein S.
  • the inventive compounds may be used for treating heparin- intolerant patients, including those with congenital and acquired antithrombin in deficiencies, heparin-induced thrombocytopenia, and those with high levels of polymo ⁇ honuclear granulocyte elastase.
  • the present compounds may also be used to inhibit blood coagulation in connection with the preparation, storage, fractionation, or use of whole blood.
  • the compounds may be used to maintain whole and fractionated blood in the fluid phase such as required for analytical and biological testing, e.g., for ex vivo platelet and other cell function studies, bioanalytical procedures, and quantitation of blood-containing components.
  • the compounds may be used as anticoagulants in extraco ⁇ eal blood circuits, such as those necessary in dialysis and surgery (such as coronary artery bypass surgery); for maintaining blood vessel patency in patients undergoing transluminal coronary angioplasty, vascular surgery including bypass grafting, arterial reconstruction, atherectomy, vascular graft and stent patency, tumor cell metastasis, and organ, tissue, or cell implantation and transplantation.
  • extraco ⁇ eal blood circuits such as those necessary in dialysis and surgery (such as coronary artery bypass surgery); for maintaining blood vessel patency in patients undergoing transluminal coronary angioplasty, vascular surgery including bypass grafting, arterial reconstruction, atherectomy, vascular graft and stent patency, tumor cell metastasis, and organ, tissue, or cell implantation and transplantation.
  • the inventive compounds are useful as anti-inflammatory agents, in treating chronic asthma, allergic rhinitis, inflammatory bowel disease, psoriasis, conjunctivitis, atopic dermatitis, pancreatis, rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, septic shock, and chronic inflammatory joint diseases, diseases of joint cartilage destruction, and/or vascular damage due to bacterial and/or viral infections.
  • the inventive compounds may be useful for treating diabetic retinopathy or motor neuron diseases such as amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, progressive muscular atrophy, and primary lateral sclerosis.
  • the inventive compounds may be useful for tissue remodeling diseases and for treating plaque instability and sequelli.
  • these compounds may be useful for treating fibrotic diseases and conditions, for example, fibrosis, scleroderma, pulmonary fibrosis, liver cirrhosis, myocardial fibrosis, neurofibromas, and hypertrophic scars.
  • the compounds of the present invention are useful in treating cancer and preventing the prothrombotic complications of cancer.
  • the compounds are useful in treating tumor growth, as an adjunct to chemotherapy, and for treating diseases involving metastases including, but not limited to cancer, more particularly, cancer of the lung, prostate, colon, breast, ovaries, and bone. These compounds may also be useful in preventing angiogenesis.
  • inventive compounds may also be used in combination with other antithrombotic or anticoagulant drugs such as thrombin inhibitors, platelet aggregation inhibitors such as aspirin, clopidogrel, ticlopidine or CS-747, warfarin, low molecular weight heparins (such as LONENOX), GPIIb/GPLIIa blockers, PAI-1 inhibitors such as XR-330 and T-686, inhibitors of ⁇ -2-antiplasmin such as anti- ⁇ -2- antiplasmin antibody and thromboxane receptor antagonists (such as ifetroban), prostacyclin mimetics, phosphodiesterase (PDE) inhibitors, such as dipyridamole or cilostazol, PDE inhibitors in combination with thromboxane receptor antagonists/thiOmboxane A synthetase inhibitors (such as picotamide), serotonin-2- receptor antagonists (such as ketanserin), fibrinogen receptor antagonists, hypolipidemic agents,
  • microsomal triglyceride transport protein inhibitors such as disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,739,135, 5,712,279 and 5,760,246), antihypertensive agents such as angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors (e.g., captopril, lisinopril or fosinopril); angiotensin-JJ receptor antagonists (e.g., irbesartan, losartan or valsartan); and/or ACE/NEP inhibitors (e.g., omapatrilat and gemopatrilat); ⁇ -blockers (such as propranolol, nadolol and carvedilol), PDE inhibitors in combination with aspirin, ifetroban, picotamide, ketanserin, or clopidogrel and the like.
  • microsomal triglyceride transport protein inhibitors such as disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,739,135, 5,712,2
  • inventive compounds are also useful in combination with anti-arrhythmic agents such as for atrial fibrillation, for example, amiodarone or dofetilide.
  • the inventive compounds may be used in combination with prothrombolytic agents, such as tissue plasminogen activator (natural or recombinant), streptokinase, reteplase, activase, lanoteplase, urokinase, prourokinase, anisolated streptokinase plasminogen activator complex (ASP AC), animal salivary gland plasminogen activators, and the like.
  • tissue plasminogen activator natural or recombinant
  • streptokinase reteplase
  • activase lanoteplase
  • urokinase prourokinase
  • anisolated streptokinase plasminogen activator complex ASP AC
  • animal salivary gland plasminogen activators and the like.
  • inventive compounds may also be used in combination with ⁇ -adrenergic agonists such as albuterol, terbutaline, formoterol, salmeterol, bitolterol, pilbuterol, or fenoterol; anticholinergics such as ipratropium bromide; anti-inflammatory cortiocosteroids such as beclomethasone, triamcinolone, budesonide, fluticasone, flunisolide or dexamethasone; and anti-inflammatory agents such as cromolyn, nedocromil, theophylline, zileuton, zafirlukast, monteleukast and pranleukast.
  • ⁇ -adrenergic agonists such as albuterol, terbutaline, formoterol, salmeterol, bitolterol, pilbuterol, or fenoterol
  • anticholinergics such as ipratropium bromide
  • inventive compounds may also be useful in combination with other anticancer strategies and chemotherapies such as taxol and/or cisplatin.
  • the compounds may act synergistically with one or more of the above agents.
  • the inventive compounds may act synergistically with the above agents to prevent reocclusion following a successful thrombolytic therapy and/or reduce the time to reperfusion.
  • reduced doses of thrombolytic agent(s) may be used, therefore minimizing potential hemorrhagic side effects.
  • the compounds of formula I may be administered by any means suitable for the condition to be treated, which may depend on the need for site-specific treatment or quantity of drug to be delivered.
  • Systematic treatment is typically preferred for cancerous conditions, although other modes of delivery are contemplated.
  • the compounds may be delivered orally, such as in the form of tablets, capsules, granules, powders, or liquid formulations including syrups; sublingually; bucally; transdermally; parenterally, such as by subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular or intrasternal injection or infusion (e.g., as sterile injectable aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions); nasally such as by inhalation spray; rectally such as in the form of suppositories, or in the form of liposome particles.
  • Dosage unit formulations containing non-toxic, pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles or diluents may be administered.
  • the compounds may be administered in a form suitable for immediate release or extended release. Immediate release or extended release may be achieved with suitable pharmaceutical compositions or, particularly in the case of extended release, with devices such as subcutaneous implants or osmotic pumps.
  • compositions for oral administration include suspensions which may contain, for example, microcrystalline cellulose for imparting bulk, alginic acid or sodium alginate as a suspending agent, methylcellulose as a viscosity enhancer, and sweeteners or flavoring agents such as those known in the art; and immediate release tablets which may contain, for example, microcrystalline cellulose, dicalcium phosphate, starch, magnesium stearate and/or lactose and/or other excipients, binders, extenders, disintegrants, diluents and lubricants such as those known in the art.
  • the inventive compounds may be orally delivered by sublingual and/or buccal administration, e.g., with molded, compressed, or freeze-dried tablets.
  • compositions may include fast-dissolving diluents such as mannitol, lactose, sucrose, and/or cyclodextrins.
  • fast-dissolving diluents such as mannitol, lactose, sucrose, and/or cyclodextrins.
  • high molecular weight excipients such as celluloses (ANICEL®) or polyethylene glycols (PEG); an excipient to aid mucosal adhesion such as hydroxypropyl cellulose (HPC), hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose (HPMC), sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (SCMC), and/or maleic anhydride copolymer (e.g., GA ⁇ TREZ®); and agents to control release such as polyacrylic copolymer (e.g., CARBOPOL 934®).
  • Lubricants, glidants, flavors, coloring agents and stabilizers may also be added for ease of fabrication and use.
  • compositions for nasal aerosol or inhalation administration include solutions which may contain, for example, benzyl alcohol or other suitable preservatives, abso ⁇ tion promoters to enhance abso ⁇ tion and/or bioavailability, and/or other solubilizing or dispersing agents such as those known in the art.
  • compositions for parenteral administration include injectable solutions or suspensions which may contain, for example, suitable non-toxic, parenterally acceptable diluents or solvents, such as mannitol, 1,3-butanediol, water, Ringer's solution, an isotonic sodium chloride solution, or other suitable dispersing or wetting and suspending agents, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides, and fatty acids, including oleic acid.
  • suitable non-toxic, parenterally acceptable diluents or solvents such as mannitol, 1,3-butanediol, water, Ringer's solution, an isotonic sodium chloride solution, or other suitable dispersing or wetting and suspending agents, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides, and fatty acids, including oleic acid.
  • compositions for rectal administration include suppositories which may contain, for example, suitable non-irritating excipients, such as cocoa butter, synthetic glyceride esters or polyethylene glycols, which are solid at ordinary temperatures but liquefy and/or dissolve in the rectal cavity to release the drug.
  • suitable non-irritating excipients such as cocoa butter, synthetic glyceride esters or polyethylene glycols, which are solid at ordinary temperatures but liquefy and/or dissolve in the rectal cavity to release the drug.
  • the effective amount of a compound of the present invention may be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the specific dose level and frequency of dosage for any particular subject may vary and will depend upon a variety of factors, including the activity of the specific compound employed, the metabolic stability and length of action of that compound, the species, age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the subject, the mode and time of administration, rate of excretion, drag combination, and severity of the particular condition.
  • An exemplary effective amount of compounds of formula I may be within the dosage range of about 0.1 to about 100 mg/kg, preferably about 0.2 to about 50 mg/kg and more preferably about 0.5 to about 25 mg/kg (or from about 1 to about 2500 mg, preferably from about 5 to about 2000 mg) on a regimen in single or 2 to 4 divided daily doses.
  • Compound was prepared as a 5 mM stock in DMSO, diluted further in DMSO and added directly to the assays.
  • the DMSO concentration for all these studies was less than 1% and compared to DMSO vehicle controls.
  • Human Factor NLIa Human Factor NLIa was obtained from Enzyme Research Labs (Cat.# HFNJJA 1640). Human recombinant tissue factor (L ⁇ ONL ⁇ from Dade Behring Cat.# B4212-100; "20 ml vial”) was diluted with 8 ml of H 2 O per vial and diluted further 1:30 into the 302 ⁇ l final assay volume.
  • Tissue factor activated FNLIa enzymatic activity was measured in a buffer containing 150 mM ⁇ aCl, 5mM CaCl , 1 mM CHAPS and 1 mg/ml PEG 6000 (pH 7.4) with 1 nM FNLIa and 100 ⁇ M D-he-Pro- Arg-AFC (Enzyme Systems Products, Km > 200 ⁇ M) 0.66% DMSO.
  • the assay (302 ⁇ l total volume) was incubated at RT for 2 hr prior to reading fluorome-ric signal (Ex 405 / Em 535) using a Victor 2 (Wallac) fluorescent plate reader.
  • Tryptase inhibition activity was measured using either isolated human skin tryptase or recombinant human tryptase prepared from the human recombinant beta- protryptase expressed by baculovirus in insect cells.
  • the expressed beta-protryptase was purified using sequential immobilized heparin affinity resin followed by an immunoaffinity column using an anti-tryptase monoclonal antibody.
  • the protryptase was activated by auto-catalytic removal of the N-terminal in the presence of dextran sulfate followed by dipeptidyl peptidase I (DPPI) removal of the two N-terminal amino acids to give the mature active enzyme (Sakai et al, J. Clin.
  • DPPI dipeptidyl peptidase I
  • the substrate (10 ⁇ l) was then added to each well to give a final concentration of 100 ⁇ M benzyloxycarbonyl-glycine-proline- arginine-p-nitroaniline (CBz-Gly-Pro-Arg-pNA).
  • the microplate was then shaken on a platform vortex mixer at a setting of 800 (Sarstedt TPM-2). After a total of three minutes incubation, 10 ⁇ l of the working stock solution of tryptase was added to each well. The microplate was vortexed again for one minute and then incubated without shaking at RT for an additional 2 minutes.
  • the microplate was read on a microplate reader (Molecular Devices UN max) in the kinetic mode (405 nm wavelength) over twenty minutes at RT.
  • IC 50 the fraction of control activity
  • FCA fraction of control activity
  • the inventive compounds demonstrated activity as inhibitors of Factors NLIa, LXa, Xa, Xla, LXa, tryptase and/or urokinase.
  • Ph phenyl
  • Boc tert-butoxycarbonyl
  • CBZ carbobenzyloxy or carbobenzoxy or benzyloxycarbonyl
  • NMM N-methyl mo ⁇ holine
  • NaHCO 3 sodium bicarbonate
  • NaBH(OAc) 3 sodium triacetoxyborohydride
  • EDC palladium on carbon
  • EDC or EDC.HCl
  • EDCI or EDCI.HCl
  • EDAC 3-ethyl-3'- (dimethylamino)propyl- carbodiimide hydrochloride (or l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)- 3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride)
  • HOBT or HOBT.H 2 O 1-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate
  • HOAT l-Hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole
  • DIAD diisopropyl azodicarboxylate
  • DLEA diisopropylethylamine
  • TBS t-butyldimethylsilyl
  • Tf trifluoromethanesulfonyl
  • Step 3B was repeated using 26 mg (0.032 mmol) of compound 3A to make another 13 mg of crude compound 3B, and the combined crade product (19 mg and 13 mg) was chromatographed over silica gel using 10% and then 15% MeOH in methylene chloride to give 22 mg of pure compound 3B as a glassy solid.
  • Step C A mixture of compound 3B (19 mg, 0.031 mmol), 2.5 mL of MeOH, and 33 ⁇ L of 1.0 N HC1 was hydrogenated for 20 min. in the presence of 6 mg of 10% Pd/C. After filtration and concentration of the filtrate, the residue was lyophilized - , resort _-
  • the compound of Example 8 was prepared in the same manner described above for Example 7, and the compounds of Examples 9- 11 were prepared in the manner described above for Example 3, using an appropriate amine-coupling component.
  • Compounds of Examples 12-27 were synthesized via automation using a TEC AN liquid handler for reagents and starting material addition and Procedures A and B below.
  • the desired amine-coupling components were prepared as set forth in the previous schemes, as known in the field, and/or as set forth in the literature, i.e., see, e.g., Yatsunami et al, S. Eur. Pat. Appl. No.
  • reaction mixtures were purified via solid phase extraction using a SCX cation exchange column (CUBCXHL5R3, 500MG/3ML/50PKG) as follows: 1). Columns were conditioned with 1.5 mL of 1:1 CH 3 CN-iPr 2 OH solution; 2). Reaction mixture (1 mL) was loaded on to SCX columns; and 3). Columns were eluted with 1.5 mL of 1: 1 CH 3 CN-iPr OH solution into 9 mm x 80 mm microtubes. The CH 3 CN-iPr 2 OH solutions were concentrated using a speed vac for 12h.
  • SCX cation exchange column CUBCXHL5R3, 500MG/3ML/50PKG
  • reaction mixtures were purified via solid phase extraction using a SCX cation exchange column (CUBCXHL5R3, 500MG/3ML/50PKG) as follows: 1). Columns were conditioned with 1.5 mL of 1:1 CH 3 CN-iPr 2 OH solution; 2). Reaction mixture (1 mL) was loaded on to SCX columns; 3). Columns were rinsed with 1.5 mL of a 1:1 CH 3 CN-iPr 2 OH solution; and
  • Example 54 The resulting product was purified by prep HPLC.
  • the tert-butyl protecting group was removed by treating the compound with TFA in DCM.
  • the trifluoro acetamide protecting group was removed by dissolving the compound in DMSO and adding 10 eq. of solid NaOH. The mixture was stirred for 12 h at rt and purified by prep HPLC to give Example 54.
  • Step C The process of Step C, above, was followed, adding 3.65 mL of 2-methyl-2- butene to a solution of compound 70E (2.71 g, 6.06 mmol) in 33 mL of tBuOH:CH 3 CN:H 2 O (6: 1:2), and using 2.36 g (26.04 mmol) of NaClO 2 ,L00 g (7.27 mmol) of NaH 2 PO 4 H O, and stirring the reaction for 30 min before adding cold H 2 O (90 mL). The aq. solution was extracted with EtOAc (150 mL), and the organic extract washed with H 2 O (2x) and sat. NaCl (2x), dried (MgSO ), filtered, and cone, to give 2.85 g (100%) of compound 70F.
  • Step I Procedures for Examples 70-160 having Formula Ik, above (Table 8)
  • a TEC AN liquid handler was used to add 35 ⁇ L of DMF to each of a number of reaction tubes (12 mm x 65 mm) in a mini -reactor. Then, to each reaction tube was added 144 ⁇ L (0.036 mmol) of a 2.5 M solution of an amine in DMF, the amine having the desired groups R 4 and R 5 . Insoluble amines were added by hand. 5J ⁇ L (0.037 mmol) of TEA was added by hand to any tubes which contained an amine salt. The TECAN was then used to add 150 ⁇ L (18 mg, 0.030 mmol) of a stock solution of scaffold Compound 70H in DMF. This addition was followed by 150 ⁇ L of a stock solution containing 5.2 ⁇ L (0.033 mmol) of DIC and 4.5 mg (0.033 mmol) of HO At in DMF. The tubes were sealed and shaken for 24 h.
  • reaction mixtures were purified by solid phase extraction using a SCX cation exchange column (CUBCXHL5R3, 500 MG/3 ML/ 50 PKG) as follows:
  • Example 172 was purified with HPLC using YMC S5 ODS 20X100 column to give 53 mg of Example 172 as a white lyophilate.
  • MS, m z (M+l) + 506.
  • 1H-NMR 500 MHz), ⁇ 9.86 (s, IH, NH), 8.13 (s, IH, ArH), 8.01 (S, IH, ArH), 7.72 (dd, IH, ArH), 6.67 (d, IH, ArH), 7.53 (d, IH, ArH), 7.45 (d, IH, ArH), 7.35 (dd, IH, ArH), 7.28 (d, IH, ArH), 6.96 (d, IH, ArH), 5.36 (s, IH, OCHO), 4.04 (s, 3H, OCH 3 ), 3.79 (d, 2H, OCH 2 ), 3.68 (d, 2H, OCH 2 ), 1.28 (s, 3H, CH 3 ), 0.80 (s, 3H, CH 3 ).
  • the aldehyde from Step D was oxidized to a carboxylic acid by dissolving 115 mg (0.27 mmol) of the aldehyde, 97 mg (1.07 mmol) of sodium chlorite, and 0J3 mL of (1.21 mmol) 2-methyl-2-butene in 15 mL t-BuOH/CH 3 CN/H 2 O (6: 1:2) at 0°C. After a solution formed, 56 mg (0.40 mmol) of NaH 2 PO4*H 2 O was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at rt and diluted with water. The organic layer was extracted with EtOAc, dried and concentrated to give a quantitative yield of the desired acid.
  • Example 173 The acid was then coupled to the 1 -amino isoquinoline amine coupling component and deprotected as described in Example 171, step F, to give Example 173.
  • 1H NMR (500 MHz) confirmed the cis product: ⁇ 8.25 (s, IH, ArH), 8.24 (d, IH, ArH), 7.90 (s, IH, ArH), 7.85 (d, IH, ArH), 7.53 (d, IH, ArH), 7.38 (d, IH, ArH), 7.37 (d, IH, ArH), 7J4 (d, IH, ArH), 6.99 (d, IH, ArH), 6.97 (d, IH, ' ArH), 6.45 (d, IH, CH), 5.74 (m, IH, CH), 4.05 (s, 3H, OCH 3 ), 2.20 (m, 2H, CH 2 ), 1.66 (m, IH, CH), 0.88 (d, 6H, 2CH 3 ).
  • Example 174C was converted to the corresponding 2-carboxylic acid using standard conditions. The acid was then coupled to the aminobenzimidazole amine- coupling component as in Example 70, step 70b, and deprotected using the DCM LLFA, (1 : 1) and saponification to give Example 174.
  • Example 175 100 mg (0.33 mmol) of the aldehyde from Step A was oxidized to a carboxylic acid using conditions as described in Example 173, Step F. The acid was coupled to the amino benzimidazole amine-coupling component and deprotected following step D of Example 174 to give Example 175.
  • Compound 176B was hydrogenated at 40 psi in the presence of Pd/C catalyst overnight to remove the benzyl group to provide compound 177 A.
  • Step B Example 177
  • Step F Example 179
  • Trifluoroacetic anhydride (1.4 mL, 10 mmol) was added to compound 191D (443 mg, 1 mmol) in 3 mL of DMF and the solution was stirred for 19 h at rt. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue taken up in EtOAc. The EtOAc was washed with water (2x), cautiously with dilute NaHCO 3 (2x), and water (2x), dried (sodium sulfate), and concentrated to give 525 mg of crade compound 191E as a yellow oil.
  • Compound 194 A was pre pared from (3 -hydroxybenzaldehyde) as described: G. M. Kesera, et al., Tetrahedron, Nol. 48 (1992), at pp. 913-922.
  • Example 195 Treatment of Example 195 (10 mg, 0.016 mmol) in 1 mL of MeOH and 0.4 mL of ether with excess etheral diazomethane for 1 h provided 9.3 mg of Example 196 as a glassy residue.
  • Step E Example 201
  • Compound 207A was prepared using the general procedure for the stannylation of pyridine carboxaldehydes described in J. Heterocyclic Chem , Vol. 31 , (1994), at p. 1161.
  • N,N,N'-trimethylethylenediamine (6.12 ml, 48 mmol) in THF (150 ml) at -78°C was added 2.0M nBuLi (22 ml, 44 mmol). Approximately 15 min. later, 2-pyridinecarboxaldehyde (4.3 g, 40 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at -78 °C for 15 min.
  • Step G Example 207
  • Compound 207F was taken up in 20%TFA CH 2 C1 2 and stirred at rt for 3 h.
  • N,N-Dimethylamine (36 ⁇ L, 0.072 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 191H (15 mg, 0.018 mmol) in DMSO (225 ⁇ L). After 24 h of shaking the reaction mixture was placed on top of a 300 mg SCX cation exchange column (CUBCX1HL3R3) which had been conditioned with MeOH (1.5 mL). The column was washed with MeOH (1.5 mL). The product was eluted with 2.0 M NHJMeOH (1.5 mL). The eluant was cone, to give 9.6 mg of (compound 229 A).

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Otolaryngology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)

Abstract

Compounds having the formula (I), are useful as serine protease inhibitors, more particularly inhibitors of Factors VIIa, Ixa, Xa, and/or Xia, wherein ring B is phenyl or pyridyl, W is preferably C(=O)NR4R5, L is a linker group, X2 comprises nitrogen or carbon, Z is an optionally-substituted monocyclic or bicyclic ring system, and R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are as defined in the specification.

Description

ACID DERIVATIVES USEFUL AS SERINE PROTEASE INHIBITORS
Related applications
This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/246,392, filed November 7, 2000, incoφorated herein by reference.
Field of the Invention
The present invention relates to acid derivatives that are inhibitors of serine proteases such as Factor Nlla, Factor LXa, Factor Xa, Factor FXIa, tryptase, and urokinase. These acid derivatives are useful as anticoagulants in treating and preventing cardiovascular diseases, as anti-inflammatory agents, and as metastasis inhibitors in treating cancer.
Background of the Invention
Under normal conditions, the coagulation system is naturally balanced in favor of anticoagulation by a number of proteins circulating in the blood. These proteins include antithrombin III, a serine-protease inhibitor, and protein C, a vitamin- K dependent protein formed in the liver. When injury or trauma occurs, thrombin is produced at precise levels through an ordered series of reactions. Thrombin is a proteolytic enzyme that occupies a central position in the coagulation process. Thrombin catalyzes the conversion of fibrinogen to fibrin, is a key effector enzyme for blood clotting, and also is pivotal for other functions, such as activation of helper proteins (including Factors N and Nπi and thrombomodulin), and its own activation. Disturbances in the natural balance between pro- and anti-coagulant forces may result in bleeding or thrombotic diseases. The series of reactions leading to thrombin production involve a number of coagulation factors present in the blood as precursors (e.g., Factors Nπ - XII). When the coagulation system is triggered (e.g., when trauma occurs), the coagulation factors are transformed into activated factors (e.g., Factors Vila, LXa, Xa, XIa, etc.). Factor Nil forms a complex with a membrane protein called tissue factor, to which Factor NLIa tightly binds. Thus, Factor NLIa is present as a complex bound to tissue factor. When triggered, the coagulation factors and tissue factor complexes undergo an ordered chain of reactions that ultimately lead to conversion of Factor X to Factor Xa, and Factor Xa catalyzes the conversion of prothrombin to thrombin.
An elevated plasma level of coagulation factors, particularly Factor NLIa, is a risk factor for fatal myocardial infarction and associated with coronary artery disease and other abnormalities of the coagulation system, e.g., thrombosis, ischemic vascular disease, intravascular clotting, stroke, embolisms, and so forth. Accordingly, antithrombotic agents have been researched and developed for use in treating cardiovascular and other diseases. Presently established antithrombotic agents include heparin, coumarin, and aspirin, among others. There are, however, limitations with these agents. For example, both heparin and coumarin have a highly-variable dose-related response, and their anticoagulant effects must be closely monitored to avoid a risk of serious bleeding. The erratic anticoagulant response of heparin is likely due to its propensity to bind non-specifically to plasma proteins. Aspirin has a limited efficacy and at high doses presents a risk of gastrointestinal bleeding. Thrombin inhibitors and their drawbacks are further discussed in WO 96/20689 to duPont Merck Pharmaceutical Co.
As may be appreciated, those in the field of pharmaceutical research continue to seek to develop new compounds and compositions having increased effectiveness and bioavailability and/or having fewer side effects. See, e.g., Jakobsen et al., "Inhibitors of the Tissue Factor/Factor Vila-induced Coagulation: Synthesis and In vitro Evaluation of Novel Specific 2-aryl Substituted 4H-3,l-benzoxazin-4- ones " Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry. Vol. 8 (August 2000), at pp. 2095-2103; and J. Hirsh et al., "Thrombosis, New Antithrombotic Agents," Lancet, Vol. 353
(April 24, 1999), at pp. 1431-36. There is particularly an interest in developing agents that can selectively and directly inhibit key factors in the complicated coagulation process. Compounds effective in inhibiting Factor Xa are described in U.S. Pat. applications Serial No. 09/478,632, filed January 6, 2000, Serial No. 09/633,751, filed August 7, 2000, and Serial No. 09/496,571 , filed February 2, 2000. Compounds effective in inhibiting Factors NJJa, Xa, as well as tryptase and urokinase are described in U.S. Pat. application Serial No. 09/458,847, filed December 13, 1999. The above referenced '632, '751, '571, and '847 applications show lactam compounds and are each assigned to the present assignee with common inventors herewith. Factor Xa inhibitors are also disclosed in PCT applic. WO 98/57937 to the duPont Merck Pharmaceutical Co.
PCT patent application WO 99/41231 to Ono Pharmaceuticals Inc., ("Ono") discloses a series of amidino derivatives such as 2-(3-(4-amidinophenylcarbamoyl)- naphthalen-2-yl)-5-((2,2-methylpropyl)carbamoyl benzoic acid, which are claimed to be Factor NJJa inhibitors. The Ono application is discussed in ohrt et al, "An Efficient Synthesis of2-(3-(4-Amidinophenylcarbamoyl)naphthalen-2-yl)-5-((2, 2- methylpropyl)carbamoyl benzoic acid: a Factor Vila Inhibitor Discovered by the Ono Pharmaceutical Company," Tetrahedron Letters, Vol. 41 (June 2000), at pp. 6041-44, which reports that Ono fails to fully describe an effective method for making the titled compound. Inhibitors of Factor NLIa are also reported in WO 01/44172 to Axys Pharm. Inc. PCT patent application WO 98/47876 to A zo Novel N.V., published October 29, 1998, discloses certain bicyclic groups such as isoquinoline groups which reportedly are advantageous for promoting pharmacological properties, and isoquinoline-containing compounds are disclosed in WO 94/29273 to SmithKline Beecham Coφ. Biphenyl compounds and/or acid substituted bicyclic compounds are also disclosed in US Pat. No. 5,612,341, US Pat. No. 6,248,767 Bl, US Pat. No. 3,995,045, EP patent application 0 206 567 A2 to Warner Lambert Co., and WO 01/70678 to Merck Patent GmbH.
The patents, patent applications, and articles cited above are incoφorated herein by reference.
The present invention provides acid-based compounds useful as inhibitors of Factor Vila, Factor LXa, Factor Xa, Factor FXIa, tryptase, and urokinase. Summary of the Invention
Acid derivatives are provided that are inhibitors of serine proteases having the Formula I:
Figure imgf000005_0001
or pharmaceutically-acceptable salts, hydrates or prodrugs thereof, wherein:
W is selected from C2-ioalkyl, C2-ιoalkenyl, substituted C2.ιoalkyl, substituted C2-
10alkenyl, -C(=O)NR4R5, -OR6, -CO2R4, -C(=O)R4, -SR4 ,-S(O)pR4, -NR4R5, - E^SOsRs, -NR4aSO NR4R5> -NR4CO2R5, -NR4C(=O)R5, -NR4aC(=O)NR4R5,
-SO NR4R5, heterocyclo, heteroaryl, aryl, and cycloalkyl; ring B is phenyl or pyridyl;
X2 is N, CH, or C, provided that X2 is C when Ri and R2 join to form a fully unsaturated ring;
L is ~(CRι8R19)s-Y-(CR18aRι9a)t;
Y is selected from -C(=O), -C(=O)NRI3- -NRι3C(=O)-, -NRι3CRI4Rι5-
-CRι4Ri5-NR13-, and -CR13Rι4-CR15Rι6-; Z is a 5 to 7-membered monocyclic or 8 to 11-membered bicyclic aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, or cycloalkyl, wherein each Z group is optionally substituted with up to two R2o and/or up to one R21, except Z is not phenyl substituted with phenyloxy when W is methoxy, s is 0 and Y is -CH2-CH -; Ri and R2 (i) are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, heteroaryl, aryl, heterocyclo, and cycloalkyl; or (ii) are taken together to form an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclo, provided that Ri and R2 do not together form pyrazole when W is methoxy and Z is biphenyl; and when Ri and R2 individually or together form a heteroaryl, aryl, heterocyclo, or cycloalkyl, said cyclic group is optionally substituted with up to three R26; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, heteroaryl, aryl, heterocyclo, cycloalkyl, or alkyl substituted with -OC(=O)R24 or -OC(=O)OR24, wherein R2 is alkyl, substituted alkyl, or cycloalkyl, provided that R3 is not phenyl when W is methoxy; R-t, Rta, R5 and R6 are (i) independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, and cycloalkyl; or alternatively, (ii) R and R5 may be taken together to form a five-to-seven membered heteroaryl or heterocyclo, except when W is -S(O)pR , then R is not hydrogen; R8 and R26 (i) are at each occurrence independently selected from hydrogen, OR30, NR3jR3 , NR ιSO2R32a, alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, alkylthio, -C(=O)H, acyl, -CO2H, alkoxycarbonyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, and phenyl, or (ii) two of R8 and/or two of R26 may be taken together to form a fused benzo ring, a fused heteroaryl, a fused cycloalkyl, or a fused heterocyclo other than a five or six membered heterocyclo having as its heteroatoms two oxygen atoms, provided further that when two R26 form a fused benzo ring, then Z is not phenyl substituted in the para position with cyano or a five-membered heterocycle or heteroaryl; R13,R14, R15, Rι6, R18, Rι8a, R19) and R19aare selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, hydroxy, and lower alkyl substituted with hydroxy or halogen;
R2o and R2ι are independently selected at each occurrence from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, -C(=O)NR22R23, -OR22, -CO2R22, -C(=O)R22, -SR22, -S(O)qR22a, -NR22R23,-NR22SO2R23, - NR22CO2R23, -NR22C(=O)R23, -NR22C(=O)NR23R33,-SO2NR22R23, - NR22SO NR23R3 , five or six membered heterocyclo or heteroaryl, phenyl, and four to seven membered cycloalkyl, wherein when R2o and/or R2ι independent of each other comprise a cyclic group, each cyclic group in turn is optionally substituted with up to tliree of Ci- alkyl, Ci- alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, amino, alkylamino, and/or cyano; R2 , R23 and R33 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, and substituted alkyl; R22ais alkyl or substituted alkyl; R3o at each occurrence is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkyl, and phenyl; R3ι and R3 at each occurrence are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, and cycloalkyl; R32ais alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; m is 0, 1 or 2 when ring B is phenyl and 0 or 1 when ring B is pyridyl; p and q are independently 1 or 2; and s and t are independently 0, 1 or 2.
The compounds of this invention are smprisingly selective inhibitors of serine proteases. For example, it has been found that certain selections for the groups "Z-L-" in formula I, provide compounds which are particularly selective for inhibition of one or more serine proteases versus other proteases. To illustrate, it has been suφrisingly found that when Z-L- is selected from:
Figure imgf000008_0001
compounds of formula I are particularly selective for inhibition of FVLIa.
As another illustration, it has been found that when Z-L-
is
Figure imgf000008_0002
compounds of formula I are particularly selective for inhibition of FXa.
Included within the scope of the invention are pharmaceutical compositions for treating a serine protease disease, an inflammatory or immune condition, or cancer, comprising at least one compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent. Also included in the invention are methods of treating such diseases comprising administering to a mammal in need of such treatment at least one compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof. Further included in the invention are compositions for use as anticoagulants during the preparation, use, storage, or fractionation of blood and methods of maintaining blood in the fluid phase during its preparation, use, storage, or fractionation. Detailed Description of the Invention
The following are definitions of terms used in this specification. The initial definition provided for a group or term herein applies to that group or term throughout this specification, individually or as part of another group, unless otherwise indicated.
The term "alkyl" refers to straight or branched chain hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Lower alkyl groups, that is, alkyl groups of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, are most preferred.
When numbers appear in a subscript after the symbol "C", the subscript defines with more specificity the number of carbon atoms that a particular group may contain. For example, "Cj.6alkyl" refers to straight and branched chain alkyl groups with one to six carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, t- butyl, n-pentyl, and so forth.
The term "substituted alkyl" refers to an alkyl group as defined above having one, two, or three substituents selected from the group consisting of halo, alkenyl, alkynyl, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, -CO2H, -C(=O)H, -CO2-alkyl, - C(=O)alkyl, -S(O)2(alkyl), keto (=O), aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, and cycloalkyl, including phenyl, benzyl, phenylethyl, phenyloxy, and phenylthio. The substituents for "substituted alkyl" groups may also be selected from the group consisting of - NR'R", -C(=O)NR'R", -CO2NR'R", -NR'CO2'R", -NR'C(=O)R", -SO2NR'R", and -NR'SO2'R", wherein each of R' and R" is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, and alkyl substituted with one to two of alkenyl, halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, alkylamino, phenyl, benzyl, phenyloxy, and benzyloxy. Alternatively, R' and R" may together form a heterocyclo or heteroaryl ring. When a substituted alkyl includes an aryl, heterocyclo, cycloalkyl, or heteroaryl substituent, said ringed systems are as defined below and thus may have zero, one, two, or three substituents, also as defined below.
When the term "alkyl" is used in conjunction with another group, e.g., arylalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, etc., the term defines with more specificity a particular substituent that a substituted alkyl will contain. For example, arylalkyl refers to a substituted alkyl group having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms and at least one aryl substituent, and "lower arylalkyl" refers to substituted alkyl groups having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and at least one aryl substituent.
The term "alkenyl" refers to straight or branched chain hydrocarbon groups having 2 to 12 carbon atoms and at least one double bond. Alkenyl groups of 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having one double bond are most preferred.
The term "alkynyl" refers to straight or branched chain hydrocarbon groups having 2 to 12 carbon atoms and at least one triple bond. Alkynyl groups of 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having one triple bond are most preferred. The term "alkylene" refers to bivalent straight or branched chain hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms, e.g., {-CH2-}n, wherein n is 1 to 12, preferably 1-8. Lower alkylene groups, that is, alkylene groups of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, are most preferred. The terms "alkenylene" and "alkynylene" refer to bivalent radicals of alkenyl and alknyl groups, respectively, as defined above. When reference is made to a substituted alkylene, alkenylene, or alkynylene group, these groups are substituted with one to three substitutents as defined above for alkyl groups. A ringed substituent of an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkylene, alkenylene, or alkynylene may be joined at a terminal atom or an available intermediate (branch or chain) atom and thus may comprise, for example, the groups
2 - ' H Q* - and so forth.
The term "alkoxy" refers to an alkyl group as defined above having one, two or three oxygen atoms (-O-) in the alkyl chain. For example, the term "alkoxy" includes the groups -O-Cι_12alkyl, -Ci-δalkylene-O- -ealkyl, -Cι-4alkylene-O-Ci- 4alkylene-O-Ci-4alkyl, O-C^alkylene-O-C^alkylene-O-Cj^alkyl, and so forth.
The term "alkylthio" refers to an alkyl group as defined above bonded through one or more sulfur (-S-) atoms. For example, the term "alkylthio" includes the groups -S-Cj.jjalkyl, -S1.6alkylene-S-C1.6alkyl, etc. The term "alkylamino" refers to an alkyl group as defined above bonded through one or more nitrogen (-NR-) groups. The term alkylamino refers to straight and branched chain groups and thus, for example, includes the groups -NH(Cj_ 12alk l) and -N(Cwalkyl)z
When a subscript is used with reference to an alkoxy, alkylthio or alkylamino, the subscript refers to the number of carbon atoms in the group in addition to heteroatoms. Thus, for example, monovalent Cj.2alkylamino includes the groups -
NH-CH3, -NH-CH2-CH3, and -N-(CH3)2. A lower alkylamino comprises an alkylamino having from one to four carbon atoms. When reference is made to a substituted alkoxy or alkylthio, the carbon atoms of said groups are substituted with one to three substituents as defined above for alkyl groups. When reference is made to a substituted alkylamino, the carbon and/or nitrogen atoms of these groups are substituted with one to three substitutents appropriately selected from the group of substituents recited above for alkyl groups. Additionally, the alkoxy, alkylthio, or alkylamino groups may be monovalent or bivalent. By "monovalent" it is meant that the group has a valency (i.e., power to combine with another group), of one, and by "bivalent" it is meant that the group has a valency of two. Thus, for example, a monovalent alkoxy includes groups such as - O-Cj.^alkyl and -C1_6alkylene-O-C1_6alkyl, whereas a bivalent alkoxy includes groups such as -O-C1 12alkylene- and -C^galkylene-O-C^galkylene-, etc.
The term "heteroalkyl" is used herein to refer saturated and unsaturated straight or branched chain hydrocarbon groups having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, preferably 2 to 8 carbon atoms, wherein one, two or three carbon atoms in the straight chain are replaced by a heteroatom (O, S or N). Thus, the term "heteroalkyl" includes alkoxy, alkylthio, and alkylamino groups, as defined above, as well as alkyl groups having a combination of heteroatoms selected from O, S, or N. A "heteroalkyl" herein may be monovalent or bivalent, and for example, may comprise the groups -O- (CH2)2-5NH-(CH2)2- or -O-(CH2)2-5NH-CH3, etc. A "substituted heteroalkyl" has one to three substituents appropriately selected from those recited above for alkyl groups.
JO- O II
The term "acyl" refers to a carbonyl group ( p ) linked to an organic radical including an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, or substituted alkynyl group, as defined above.
O II
The term "alkoxycarbonyl" refers to a carboxy or ester group ( — c ° ) linked to an organic radical including an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, or substituted alkynyl group, as defined above.
The term "halo" or "halogen" refers to chloro, bromo, fiuoro and iodo.
The term "haloalkyl" means an alkyl having one or more halo substituents, e.g., including trifluoromethyl.
The term "haloalkoxy" means an alkoxy group having one or more halo substituents. For example, "haloalkoxy" includes -OCF3.
The term "sulfonyl" refers to a sulphoxide group (i.e., -S(O)1.2-) linked to an organic radical including an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, or substituted alkynyl group, as defined above. The organic radical to which the sulphoxide group is attached may be monovalent (e.g., -SO2-alkyl), or bivalent
(e.g., -SO2-alkylene, etc.)
The term "sulfonamide" refers to the group -S(O)2NR'R", wherein R' and R" may be hydrogen or alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, or substituted alkynyl, as defined above. R' and R" may be monovalent or bivalent (e.g., -SO2-NH-alkylene, etc.)
The term "aryl" refers to phenyl, biphenyl, 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl, with phenyl being preferred. The term "aryl" includes such rings having zero, one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of halo, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, -CO2H, -C(=O)H, CO2-alkyl, -C(=O)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, phenylethyl, phenyloxy, phenylthio, cycloalkyl, heterocyclo, heteroaryl, -NR'R", -C(=O)NR'R", -CO2NR'R", -NR'CO2'R", -NR'C(=O)R", - SO2NR'R", -NR'SO2'R", and/or alkyl substituted with one to three of halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, -CO2H, -C(=O)H, CO2-alkyl, -C(=O)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, phenylethyl, phenyloxy, phenylthio, cycloalkyl, heterocyclo, heteroaryl, - NR'R", -C(=O)NR'R", -CO2NR'R", -NR'CO2'R", -NR'C(=O)R", -SO2NR'R", and/or -NR'SO2'R", wherein each of R' and R" is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxyalkyl, and arylalkyl, or R' and R" together form a heterocyclo or heteroaryl ring. When an aryl is substituted with a further ring, said ring may in turn be substituted with one to three of halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, alkylamino, phenyl, benzyl, phenyloxy, and benzyloxy.
The term "cycloalkyl" refers to fully saturated and partially unsaturated hydrocarbon rings of 3 to 9, preferably 3 to 7 carbon atoms. The term "cycloalkyl" includes such rings having zero, one, two, or three substituents, preferably zero or one, selected from the group consisting of halo, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, nitro, cyano, oxo (=O), hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, -CO2H, -C(=O)H, CO2-alkyl, -C(=O)alkyl, keto, =N-OH, =N-O-alkyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, a five or six membered ketal (i.e. 1,3-dioxolane or 1,3-dioxane), a four to seven membered carbocyclic ring, -NR'R", - C(=O)NR'R", -CO2NR'R", -NR'CO2'R", -NR'C(=O)R", -SO2NR'R", - NR'SO2'R", and/or alkyl substituted with one to three of halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, -CO2H, -C(=O)H, CO2-alkyl, -C(=O)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, phenylethyl, phenyloxy, phenylthio, a four to seven membered carbocyclic ring, heterocyclo, heteroaryl, -NR'R", -C(=O)NR'R", -CO2NR'R", -NR'CO2'R", - NR'C(=O)R", -SO2NR'R", and/or -NR'SO2'R", wherein each of R' and R" is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxyalkyl, and arylalkyl, or R' and R" together form a heterocyclo or heteroaryl ring. When a cycloalkyl is substituted with a further ring, said ring may in turn be substituted with one to three of halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, alkylamino, phenyl, benzyl, phenyloxy, and benzyloxy.
The term "heterocyclo" refers to substituted and unsubstituted non-aromatic 3 to 7 membered monocyclic groups, 7 to 11 membered bicyclic groups, and' 10 to 15 membered tricyclic groups which have at least one heteroatom (O, S or N) in at least one of the rings. Each ring of the heterocyclo group containing a heteroatom can contain one or two oxygen or sulfur atoms and/or from one to four nitrogen atoms, provided that the total number of heteroatoms in each ring is four or less, and further provided that the ring contains at least one carbon atom. The fused rings completing the bicyclic and tricyclic groups may contain only carbon atoms and may be saturated, partially saturated, or unsaturated. The nitrogen and sulfur atoms may optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen atoms may optionally be quaternized. The heterocyclo group may be attached at any available nitrogen or carbon atom. The heterocyclo ring may contain zero, one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of halo, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, nitro, cyano, oxo, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, -CO2H, - C(=O)H, CO2-alkyl, -C(=O)alkyl, keto, =N-OH, =N-O-alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, a five or six membered ketal (i.e. 1,3-dioxolane or 1,3-dioxane), -NR'R", -C(=O)NR'R", -CO2NR'R", -NR'CO2'R", -NR'C(=O)R", -SO2NR'R", - NR'SO2'R", and/or alkyl substituted with one to three of halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, -CO2H, -C(=O)H, CO2-alkyl, -C(=O)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, phenylethyl, phenyloxy, phenylthio, cycloalkyl, heterocyclo, heteroaryl, -NR'R", - C(=O)NR'R", -CO2NR'R", -NR'CO2'R", -NR'C(=O)R", -SO2NR'R", and/or - NR'SO2'R", wherein each of R' and R" is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxyalkyl, and arylalkyl, or R' and R" together form a heterocyclo or heteroaryl ring. When a heterocyclo is substituted with a further ring, said ring may in turn be substituted with one to three of halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, alkylamino, phenyl, benzyl, phenyloxy, and benzyloxy.
Exemplary monocyclic groups include azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, oxetanyl, imidazolinyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, 2-oxopiperazinyl, 2-oxopiperidinyl, 2- oxopyrrolodinyl, 2-oxoazepinyl, azepinyl, 4-piperidonyl, tetrahydropyranyl, moφholinyl, thiamoipholinyl, thiamoφholinyl sulfoxide, thiamoφholinyl sulfone, 1,3-dioxolane and tetrahydro-lJ-dioxothienyl and the like. Exemplary bicyclic heterocyclo groups include quinuclidinyl. The term "heteroaryl" refers to substituted and unsubstituted aromatic 5 or 6 membered monocyclic groups, 9 or 10 membered bicyclic groups, and 11 to 14 membered tricyclic groups which have at least one heteroatom (O, S or N) in at least one of the rings. Each ring of the heteroaryl group containing a heteroatom can contain one or two oxygen or sulfur atoms and/or from one to four nitrogen atoms provided that the total number of heteroatoms in each ring is four or less and each ring has at least one carbon atom. The fused rings completing the bicyclic and tricyclic groups may contain only carbon atoms and may be saturated, partially saturated, or unsaturated. The nitrogen and sulfur atoms may optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen atoms may optionally be quaternized. Heteroaryl groups which are bicyclic or tricyclic must include at least one fully aromatic ring but the other fused ring or rings may be aromatic or non-aromatic. The heteroaryl group may be attached at any available nitrogen or carbon atom of any ring. The heteroaryl ring system may contain zero, one, two or three substituents selected from the group consisting of halo, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, -CO2H, -C(=O)H, CO2-alkyl, -C(=O)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, phenylethyl, phenyloxy, phenylthio, cycloalkyl, heterocyclo, a further monocyclic heteroaryl, -NR'R", -C(=O)NR'R", - CO2NR'R", -NR'CO2'R", -NR'C(=O)R", -SO2NR'R", -NR'SO2'R", and/or alkyl substituted with one to three of halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, -CO H, -C(=O)H, CO2-alkyl, -C(=O)alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, phenylethyl, phenyloxy, phenylthio, cycloalkyl, heterocyclo, heteroaryl, -NR'R", -C(=O)NR'R", -CO2NR'R", -NR'CO2'R", -NR'C(=O)R", -SO2NR'R", and/or -NR'SO2'R", wherein each of R' and R" is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxyalkyl, and arylalkyl, or R' and R" together form a heterocyclo or heteroaryl ring. When a heteroaryl is substituted with a further ring, said ring may in turn be substituted with one to three of halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, alkylamino, phenyl, benzyl, phenyloxy, and benzyloxy.
Exemplary monocyclic heteroaryl groups include pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, isothiazolyl, furanyl, thienyl, oxadiazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl and the like.
Exemplary bicyclic heteroaryl groups include indolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzodioxolyl, benzoxaxolyl, benzothienyl, quinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzopyranyl, indolizinyl, benzofuranyl, chromonyl, coumarinyl, benzopyranyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, indazolyl, pyrrolopyridyl, furopyridinyl, dihydroisoindolyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl and the like.
Exemplary tricyclic heteroaryl groups include carbazolyl, benzidolyl, phenanthrollinyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, xanthenyl and the like. The term "carbocyclic" refers to optionally substituted aromatic or non- aromatic 3 to 7 membered monocyclic and 7 to 11 membered bicyclic groups, in which all atoms of the ring or rings are carbon atoms.
When the term "unsaturated" is used herein to refer to a ring or group, the ring or group may be fully unsaturated or partially unsaturated. The term "metal ion" refers to alkali metal ions such as sodium, potassium or lithium and alkaline earth metal ions such as magnesium and calcium, as well as zinc and aluminum.
Whenever a bond appears in a formula as a dashed-double bond, i.e., with one
H rl2 bond appearing as a dash as in ~"C— C jt should be understood that such bonds may be selected from single or double bonds, as appropriate given the selections for adjacent atoms and bonds. For example, in formula I, above, when X2 is N or CH, the bonds linking Ri to X2 and X2 to C6 are single bonds; and when X2 is C, one of the bonds linking X2 to an adjacent atom is a double bond, i.e., either a bond to Rt or to C6 is a double bond. It should be understood that one skilled in the field may make various substitutions for each of the groups recited in the claims herein, without departing from the spirit or scope of the invention. For example, one skilled in the field may replace a W group recited in the claims with a cyano, halogen, or methyl group. The linker group "L" recited in the claims may be replaced with the group -(R')u-Y'- (R")v- wherein Y' is a Y group recited in claim 1, is a bond, or is selected from - C(=O)-, -[C(=O)]2-, -O-, -NR-, -C(=NR)-, -S(O)ι-2-, -NRC(=O)NR-, -NRSO2- , or - SO2NR-, wherein R is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, a heterocyclo or carbocyclic ring, and so forth, R' and R" may comprise substituted or unsubstituted alkylene, alkenylene, or alkynylene, and u and v may be 0-4. Additionally, the acid group -CO2R3 may be joined to the phenyl or pyridyl ring B with a linker such as a methylene group or replaced with other acid functional groups such as -SO3H, -P(=O)(OR)2, -SO2NHC(=O)R, -C(=O)NHSO2R, - C(=O)NHOH, -[C(=O)]2OR, or tetrazole, wherein R is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, and so forth.
It should be further understood that for compounds of formula I, the linker group "L" is inserted into the formula I in the same direction set forth in the text. Thus, for example, if L is recited as -CH2-Y-, this means the -CH2- group is attached to Z, and the Y group is attached to the C6 carbon atom i.e., to which X is
Figure imgf000017_0001
-NR13C(=O)-, the carbonyl group C(=O) is attached to the C6 carbon atom and the nitrogen group -NR1 - is attached to Z, as in many Examples herein. Conversely, when Y is recited as -C(O)NR1 - this means the carbonyl group C(=O) is attached to Z and the nitrogen group -NR13- is attached to the C6 carbon atom.
Throughout the specification, groups and substituents thereof may be chosen by one skilled in the field to provide stable moieties and compounds.
The compounds of formula I form salts which are also within the scope of this invention. Unless otherwise indicated, reference to an inventive compound is understood to include reference to salts thereof. The term "salt(s)" denotes acidic and/or basic salts formed with inorganic and/or organic acids and bases. In addition, the term "salt(s) may include zwitterions (inner salts), e.g., when a compound of formula I contains both a basic moiety, such as an amine or a pyridine or imidazole ring, and an acidic moiety, such as a carboxylic acid. Pharmaceutically acceptable (i.e., non-toxic, physiologically acceptable) salts are preferred, such as, for example, acceptable metal and amine salts in which the cation does not contribute significantly to the toxicity or biological activity of the salt. However, other salts may be useful, e.g., in isolation or purification steps which may be employed during preparation, and thus, are contemplated within the scope of the invention. Salts of the compounds of the formula I may be formed, for example, by reacting a compound of the formula I with an amount of acid or base, such as an equivalent amount, in a medium such as one in which the salt precipitates or in an aqueous medium followed by lyophilization.
Exemplary acid addition salts include acetates (such as those formed with acetic acid or trihaloacetic acid, for example, trifluoroacetic acid), adipates, alginates, ascorbates, aspartates, benzoates, benzenesulfonates, bisulfates, borates, butyrates, citrates, camphorates, camphorsulfonates, cyclopentanepropionates, digluconates, dodecylsulfates, ethanesulfonates, fumarates, glucoheptanoates, glycerophosphates, hemisulfates, heptanoates, hexanoates, hydrochlorides (formed with hydrochloric acid), hydrobromides (formed with hydrogen bromide), hydroiodides, 2- hydroxyethanesulfonates, lactates, maleates (formed with maleic acid), methanesulfonates (formed with methanesulfonic acid), 2-naphthalenesulfonates, nicotinates, nitrates, oxalates, pectinates, persulfates, 3-phenylpropionates, phosphates, picrates, pivalates, propionates, salicylates, succinates, sulfates (such as those formed with sulfuric acid), sulfonates (such as those mentioned herein), tartrates, thiocyanates, toluenesulfonates such as tosylates, undecanoates, and the like.
Exemplary basic salts include ammonium salts, alkali metal salts such as sodium, lithium, and potassium salts; alkaline earth metal salts such as calcium and magnesium salts; barium, zinc, and aluminum salts; salts with organic bases (for example, organic amines) such as trialkylamines such as triethylamine, procaine, dibenzylamine, N-benzyl-β-phenethylamine, 1-ephenamine, N,N'-dibenzylethylene- diamine, dehydroabietylamine, N-ethylpiperidine, benzylamine, dicyclohexylamine or similar pharmaceutically acceptable amines and salts with amino acids such as arginine, lysine and the like. Basic nitrogen-containing groups may be quaternized with agents such as lower alkyl halides (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), dialkyl sulfates (e.g., dimethyl, diethyl, dibutyl, and diamyl sulfates), long chain halides (e.g., decyl, lauryl, myristyl and stearyl chlorides, bromides and iodides), aralkyl halides (e.g., benzyl and phenethyl bromides), and others. Preferred salts include monohydrochloride, hydrogensulfate, methanesulfonate, phosphate or nitrate.
Prodrags and solvates of the inventive compounds are also contemplated. The term "prodrug" denotes a compound which, upon administration to a subject, undergoes chemical conversion by metabolic or chemical processes to yield a compound of the formula I, and/or a salt and/or solvate thereof. Various forms of prodrags are well known in the art. For examples of such prodrug derivatives, see: a) Design of Prodrugs. edited by H. Bundgaard, (Elsevier, 1985) and Methods in Enzymology, Nol.42, p. 309-396, edited by K. Widder, et al. (Acamedic Press, 1985); b) A Textbook of Drug Design and Development, edited by Krosgaard- Larsen and H. Bundgaard, Chapter 5, "Design and Application of Prodrugs," by H. Bundgaard, p. 113-191 (1991); and c) H. Bundgaard, Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, 8, 1-38 (1992), each of which is incoφorated herein by reference.
Compounds containing a carboxy group can form physiologically hydrolyzable esters which serve as prodrags by being hydrolyzed in the body to yield formula I compounds per se. For example, in compounds of formula (I), prodrags comprise compounds wherein the upper ring substituent -CO R3 is a group that will hydrolyze in the body to compounds where said substituent is -CO2H. Such prodrugs are preferably administered orally since hydrolysis in many instances occurs principally under the influence of the digestive enzymes. Parenteral administration may be used where the ester per se is active, or in those instances where hydrolysis occurs in the blood. Examples of physiologically hydrolyzable esters of compounds of formula I include Chalky-benzyl, 4-methoxybenzyl, indanyl, phthalyl, methoxymethyl, C^galkanoyloxy-C^galkyl, e.g. acetoxymethyl, pivaloyloxymethyl or propionyloxymethyl, C^galkoxycarbonyloxy-C^galkyl, e.g. methoxycarbonyl- oxymethyl or ethoxycarbonyloxymethyl, glycyloxymethyl, phenylglycyloxymethyl, (5-methyl-2-oxo-l,3-dioxolen-4-yl)-methyl and other well known physiologically hydrolyzable esters used, for example, in the penicillin and cephalosporin arts. Such esters may be prepared by conventional techniques known in the art.
Compounds of formula I and salts thereof may exist in their tautomeric form, in which hydrogen atoms are transposed to other parts of the molecules and the chemical bonds between the atoms of the molecules are consequently rearranged. It should be understood that the all tautomeric forms, insofar as they may exist, are included within the invention. Additionally, inventive compounds may have trans and cis isomers and may contain one or more chiral centers, therefore existing in enantiomeric and diastereomeric forms. The invention includes all such isomers, as well as mixtures of cis and trans isomers, mixtures of diastereomers and racemic mixtures of enantiomers (optical isomers). When no specific mention is made of the configuration (cis, trans or R or S) of a compound (or of an asymmetric carbon), then any one of the isomers or a mixture of more than one isomer is intended. The processes for preparation can use racemates, enantiomers or diastereomers as starting" materials. When enantiomeric or diastereomeric products are prepared, they can be separated by conventional methods for example, chromatographic or fractional crystallization.
The compounds of the instant invention may, for example, be in the free or hydrate form, and may be obtained by methods exemplified by the following descriptions.
Preferred Compounds
Preferred compounds are those having the formula (I),
Figure imgf000021_0001
and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts, prodrugs, or solvates thereof, in which: W is selected from -C(=O)NR R5, -OR6, optionally-substituted heterocycle, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, and substituted alkenyl; ring B is phenyl;
X2 is N, CH, or C, provided that X2 is C when Ri and R2 join to form a fully unsaturated ring;
L is -(CH2)S-Y-;
Y is selected from -C(=O), -NH-C(=O)-, -NH-CH2- and -CH2-CH2-; Z is selected from
Figure imgf000021_0002
(
Figure imgf000021_0003
Ri and R2 (i) are independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl and arylalkyl; or (ii) are taken together to form an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclo; wherein when Ri and R2 individually or together form a heteroaryl, aryl, heterocyclo or cycloalkyl, said cyclic group is optionally substituted with up to two R26;
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, or alkyl substituted with -OC(=O)R2 or - OC(=O)OR24, wherein R24 is alkyl, substituted alkyl, or cycloalkyl;
R-t is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, heterocyclo or heteroaryl;
R6 is selected from Cι-6alkyl, more preferably C2-6alkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;
R8 and R26 (i) are at each occurrence independently selected from hydrogen, OR30, NR3ιR32, alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, alkylthio, -C(=O)H, acyl, -CO2H, alkoxycarbonyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, and phenyl, or (ii) two of R8 and/or two of R 6 may be taken together to form a fused benzo ring, a fused heteroaryl, or a fused heterocyclo other than a five or six membered heterocyclo having as its heteroatoms two oxygen atoms, provided further that when two R 6 form a fused benzo ring, then Z is not phenyl substituted in the para position with cyano or a five-membered heterocycle or heteroaryl;
R o and R21 are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -C(=O)NH2,
-C(=O)Cι-4alkyl, -NH2, -NHCι-4alkyl, -S-Ci-4alkyl, -O-Cι-4alkyl, Cι-4alkyl, d- 4alkyl substituted with NH2, and five or six membered heterocyclo or heteroaryl;
R3o at each occurrence is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkyl, and phenyl;
R3ι and R32 at each occurrence are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, and cycloalkyl; m and n are independently 0, 1 or 2; and s is 0, 1 or 2. In compounds of formula I, the group W is preferably -C(=O)NR R5 and the groups Z-L- taken together are preferably selected from:
Figure imgf000023_0001
More preferred compounds are those compounds having the formulae:
Figure imgf000023_0002
in which:
X3 is CH or N;
R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, or lower alkyl substituted with one of OC(=O)R2 and OC(=O)O-R24, wherein R 4 is alkyl or cycloalkyl; R4 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
R5 is Ci-6alkyl, -CH(CH2OH)C(CH3)3, or Cι-2alkyl substituted with C5- 6cycloalkylene; either (a) s is 0 and Z is selected from
Figure imgf000024_0001
(b) s is 1 and Z is selected from
Figure imgf000024_0002
R26 s C2-6straight or branched alkenyl, -OR 0 or -NR3ιR32, and R27 is hydrogen, or R26 and R27 together form a fused benzo ring;
R3o is C1-5 straight or branched chain alkyl, C2-6straight or branched alkenyl, C3-
5cycloalkyl, or C1-4. straight or branched chain alkyl substituted with one to two of halogen, lower alkoxy, and C3-5cycloalkyl;
R3ι and R 2 are selected from hydrogen and lower alkyl.
Most preferred are compounds having the formula:
Figure imgf000025_0001
in which
R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, or lower alkyl substituted with -OC(=O)R24 or OC(=O)OR , wherein R is alkyl or cycloalkyl;
Z is selected from:
Figure imgf000025_0002
Figure imgf000025_0003
Figure imgf000025_0004
R 5 is hydrogen or hydroxymethyl; and R26 is Cι-3alkoxy or NH(Ci-4alkyl).
Methods of Preparation
The compounds of the invention may be prepared by the exemplary processes described in the following Schemes A through D. Methods for making intermediates including appropriately-protected amine-coupling components are shown in Schemes E through G and I through X, and Scheme H shows a method for making an unprotected amine-coupling component. These amines may be coupled to substrates to make compounds of formula I and deprotected, when necessary or desired, as shown in Schemes A-D and the Examples. Exemplary reagents and procedures for these reactions appear hereinafter and in the working Examples. Starting materials are commercially available or can be readily prepared by one of ordinary skill in the art as shown herein or as described in the literature. For all of the schemes, the groups Ri-R2 , W, X, Z, r, s etc., are as described herein for a compound of formula I, unless otherwise indicated.
SCHEME A
nal)
Figure imgf000026_0001
Figure imgf000026_0002
1 I*
Compounds of formula la can be made by reacting acid 1 with an amine having the desired group Z, i.e., Z-NHR13. The 2-position acid group is suitably protected (P'), and the reaction is carried out in the presence of coupling reagent(s) such as DCC/HOBT/DMAP, EDC/DMAP, or DIC/HOAT to afford the corresponding amide compound. The group P' optionally may be deprotected to afford the compound of formula la wherein R3 is hydrogen, or the group P' may be retained wherein P' comprises the desired group R3. Alternatively, the group P' may be deprotected to afford the group CO2H, with the group CO2H then converted to another desired R3 group. To illustrate, the compound having the acid group CO2H may be reacted with a halide having the desired R3 group, i.e., X-R3 where X is Cl, Br, or I, in the presence of base, or the acid compound may be coupled with an alcohol such as R3OH in a coupling reagent. It may be necessary or desired to protect additional functional groups besides the 2-position acid before performing the coupling reaction, as one skilled in the field will appreciate. Those additional protecting groups can be removed after the coupling using appropriate deprotecting conditions. Preparation of acids 1 , wherein R\ and R2 together form an unsaturated carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring, is described in WO 99/041231, incoφorated herein by reference, and described in the Examples that appear hereinafter.
SCHEME B
Figure imgf000027_0001
lb
Similar to Scheme A, the aldehyde 2, wherein the 2-position acid group is suitably protected (P'), can be coupled with an amine Z-NHR13 in the presence of a reducing reagent such as sodium triacetoxyborohydride, to afford the corresponding amine compound having the group CO2P'. Upon optional deprotection of the group P', and optionally further reaction with, for example, a halide X-R3 or alcohol R3OH as described in Scheme A, the compound of formula lb is provided, having the desired group R3. Also as in Scheme A, it may be necessary or desired to protect additional functional groups besides the 2-position acid before performing the coupling reaction. Those additional protecting groups can be removed using appropriate deprotecting conditions. Preparation of aldehydes 2, wherein Ri and R2 together form an unsaturated carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring, is described in WO 99/041231, incoφorated herein, and further shown in the Examples hereinafter.
SCHEME C
Figure imgf000028_0001
3b
1. Z-(CRι8Rj )sNHRi3, coupling reagent(s)
2. Deprotection
Figure imgf000028_0002
Figure imgf000028_0003
Ila
Aryl fluoride 3a is reacted with amine 4 in DMSO in the presence of a base such as DLEA to afford intermediate 5. Alternatively, triflate 3b is reacted with amine 4 in the presence of a suitable palladium reagent to afford intermediate 5. Selective deprotection of the P" group of compound 5 affords acid 6. Acid 6 is reacted with an appropriate amine in the presence of suitable coupling reagents. Compounds having the desired group R3 are obtained as described in Scheme A, i.e., by optional deprotection, further reaction or coupling, to afford compounds of formula Lla, above.
SCHEME D
Figure imgf000029_0001
Aryl fluoride 3a is reacted with amine 7 in DMSO in the presence of a base such as DLEA to afford compound 8, where Ri is defined as above except where Ri and R form a ring, the ring is a heterocyclo. Selective deprotection of the P" group affords acid 9. Reaction of acid 9 with an amine Z-NHRι3 in the presence of coupling reagent(s) such as DCC/HOBT/DMAP, EDC/DMAP, or DIC/HOAT affords the corresponding amide compound. Compounds having the desired group R3 are obtained as described in Scheme A, i.e., by optional deprotection, further reaction or coupling, to afford compounds of formula Lib, above.
SCHEME E
Figure imgf000030_0001
10 11
DS/THF, 70°C
Figure imgf000030_0002
Figure imgf000030_0003
15b 16
Compound 10 was prepared according to J. Med. Chem., Vol. 42 (1999), at pp. 3510-3519, from 2-methyl-4-nitroaniline. A mixture of compound 10 and 1-(1,1- dimethylethoxy)-N,N, N', N'-tetramethyl-methanediamine in dry DMF (10 mL) was stirred at 70°C for 2h under N2. After cooling to rt, the reaction mixture was treated with hexane, and the solid was collected by filtration and washed with hexane to give compound JJ as black crystals. Compound ϋ was converted to compound 13 in two alternate ways. In one approach, compound ϋ was converted to 13. by adding IN LiHMDS to a solution of ϋ in dry THF under N2. The reaction mixture was stirred at 65 °C for 2 h. After cooling to rt, 12 N HC1 was added and the reaction mixture stirred at 50°C for lh. After cooling to rt, the mixture was neutralized with sat'd NaHCO3, the product extracted with EtOAc, and the organic layer washed with water and sat'd NaCl. The product was concentrated and purified to give compound 13 as a yellow solid.
Alternatively, compound JJ was converted to 13 by first mixing compound JJ and 2,4-dimethoxylbenzylamine in DMF and stirring the mixture at 140°C for 3h. The solvent was removed by vacuum distillation and residue treated with EtOAc. The orange solid was collected by filtration and washed with hexane to give compound 12. To a solution of compound Yλ in anisole was added TFA. The reaction mixture was stirred at 90°C for lh and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The residue was treated with sat'd NaHCO3 (30 mL) and the product collected by filtration and washed with water to afford compound 13. Compound 13 (366 mg, 1.93 mmol) and 2,4-dimethoxybenzaldehyde were heated for 16 h at 125-130°C with a stream of nitrogen passing in and out of the reaction flask, and sampling of the reaction mixture at 80°C indicated conversion to compound 14.
To a solution of 14 and 2,4-dimethoxybenzaldehyde above in THF was added sodium triacetoxyborohydride. The reaction was stirred for 22 h and additional sodium triacetoxyborohydride (1.23g, 5.8 mmol) was added. After 40 h, the reaction was concentrated to an oil which was taken up in EtOAc, water, and dilute sodium bicarbonate. The EtOAc was washed with water (3x), dried (sodium sulfate), and concentrated to an oily residue, which was chromatographed to give 140 mg of compound J_5a as a glassy residue and 228 mg of compound 15b as an amoφhous solid.
Hydrogenation of compound 15b in EtOAc and MeOH in the presence 10% Pd/C for 1 h at one atmosphere afforded compound 16 as an amoφhous solid. Compound 16 was coupled to a substrate and deprotected to produce compounds of formula I.
SCHEME F
Figure imgf000032_0001
17 18
A mixture of compound 13 and di-t-butyl dicarbonate in dry THF was refluxed under N2 for 3h. The mixture was concentrated and the residue purified by flash chromatography eluting with EtOAc/Hexane (1:3) to give compound JJ as a white solid. Compound JJ and Pd/C (10 %) in MeOH /dioxane was hydrogenated (balloon with H2) for 3.5 h. Filtration and concentration yielded 18 as a brown foam (59 mg, 83%), which was used in Examples hereinafter as a protected amine-coupling component to make compounds of formula I.
SCHEME G
Figure imgf000033_0001
Figure imgf000033_0002
Figure imgf000033_0003
Compound 20 was synthesized from compound 19 following the procedure described in Osborn, et al., J.Chem. Soc. (1956), at 4191, and compounds 21_a and 21b were prepared according to Poradowska et al., Synthesis, (1975), at p. 732. Compound 2 a and phthalic acid anhydride 22 were powdered and mixed well. Heating the mixture for 2 h at 130 to 150°C and finally 2 min to 220°C finished the reaction. The cooled solid material of crude compound 23 was powdered and washed with ether/DCM (10:1) and dried yielding compound 23 as a beige powder.
Compound 23 and MCPA (Aldrich,- 77%) were dissolved in DCE and stirred for 24 h. The resulting suspension was diluted with 50 ml ether and the crude product filtered, washed with ether, dried and purified to yield compound 24 as a light yellow powder. Compound 24 and POCl3 were heated for 12 h to 90°C. Excess POCl3 was removed in vacuo and the residue stirred with ice water /DCM for 10 min. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO and concentrated. The oily residue was purified to yield compound 25. POCl3 was removed by dissolving the material in DCM and stirring with N -diisopropylaminomethyl polystyrol. Filtration, concentration, and purification gave compound 25 as off-white needles
Compound 25 and N-methylhydrazine were stirred in DCM to produce compound 26. Compound 26 and 2,4-dimethoxybenzylamine were heated to 110 to 120°C and stirred to produce an oily crude material which was purified to give protected amine-coupling component 27 as a beige foam.
SCHEME H
Figure imgf000034_0001
Compound 26 from Scheme G and condensed N-methylamine were heated to 100°C for 24 h. Cooling, removal of the excess N-methylamine, and purification gave unprotected amine-coupling component 28 as an off-white solid.
SCHEME I
Figure imgf000035_0001
29
Figure imgf000035_0002
Figure imgf000035_0003
Following the procedure described in Scheme G, compound 29 was prepared from compound 19 and phthalic acid anhydride 22; compound 30 was prepared from compound 29 and MCPA; compound 31 was prepared from 30 and POCl3; compound 32 was prepared from compound 3_1 and methylhydrazine; and protected amine-coupling component 33 was prepared from 32 and dimethoxybenzylamine. SCHEME J
Figure imgf000036_0001
34 35 Δ
Figure imgf000036_0002
36 37
Compound 34 and bis-protected isothiourea 35 were suspended in MeOH and refluxed for 5 days. After the second day, n-BuOH was added and CH3SH blown out with N2. The reflux temperature was set to 100°C. After 3 more days refluxing, compound 36 crystallized and the reaction was completed. The mixture was cooled to 50°C, filtered, and the gray filter cake was washed with MeOH and recrystalhzed from DMF/MeOH to give compound 36 in the form of grey fine crystals.
Compound 36 was suspended in AcOH with stirring. Zn powder was added. After 1 hr, the reaction mixture was filtered, the filtrate concentrated, water was added, and then filtration, washing of the filter residue, and drying gave Cbz- protected amine coupling component 37 as a puφle powder.
SCHEME K
Figure imgf000037_0001
Figure imgf000037_0002
Cyanogen bromide was added to a flask charged with compound 34, water and EtOH. After 12 h, the reaction mixture was filtered, the filtrate was basified to pH=9 using cone. NH4OH, the solution was cone, to one third volume, and H2O was added. After 1 h at 4°C, the solid was filtered and dried under vacuum to give compound 38.
A solution of Boc anhydride in THF was added to a cold (0°C) solution of compound 38 in THF (90 mL). DMAP was added, and the reaction mixture was stirred at rt. After 30 min, the solution was concentrated, the residue was dissolved in DCM, and then the solution was washed with 2% aq. NH4C1 and sat. NaCl, dried (MgSO ), and cone, to give compound 39.
MeOH and EtOAc (3:1) was added to compound 39. 10% Pd/C was added and a H2 atmosphere introduced via balloon. After 12 h, the reaction mixture was filtered, the filtrate was cone, and the residue was placed under vacuum to give Boc- protected amine coupling component 40.
SCHEME L
Figure imgf000038_0001
MeOH, TosHcat.
Figure imgf000038_0002
Figure imgf000038_0003
Compound 4J, was dissolved in pyridine and while stirring, 2.55 g (25 mM) acetic acid anhydride was added over 15 min. Stirring continued for 24 h. The product was concentrated in vacuo and the resulting oil taken up with DCM/water. The pH was adjusted to 3.0 with citric acid. The phases were separated and the aqueous layer washed two more times with 50 ml DCM each time. The combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried (MgSO4), and concentrated to give compound 42.
Compound 42 and GDI were dissolved in 40 ml THF. After 30 min stirring, the solution was slowly added at 0°C to 150 ml sat'd solution of NH3 gas in THF. After stirring for 24 h at rt, the reaction mixture was filtered and the filtrate concentrated. The oily residue was dissolved in 30 ml MeOH from which after several minutes 43a crystallized. The mother liquor contained a mixture of 43a and 43b. Refluxing for 4 h in the presense of TosOH led to a complete cyclizsation of 43b to 43a.
Compound 43a and 760 mg (1.90 mM) Laweson reagent were suspended in 70 ml xylene and refluxed at 140°C for 3 h. After cooling to rt, compound 44 crystallized out of the solution.
Compound 44 and 3 ml 1.0 N NaOH were dissolved in 15 ml DMF. To the stirred solution was added 166 ul (3 JO mM) CH3I. After 5 min, compound 45 crystallized, 50ml water EtOAc was added, and the aq. layer was extracted two times with 20 ml EtOAc. The combined organic phase was washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), and the product 45 concentrated and purified.
Compound 45 and 2,4-dimethoxybenzylamine were dissolved in 10 ml toluene and refluxed for 2.5 h. After adding 30 ml ether to the cooled solution, filtration and drying, compound 46 was obtained as yellow crystals.
Compound 46 was dissolved in 10ml AcOH and while stirring, 200 mg (3.06mM) Zn powder was added. After 30 min, filtered from excess Zn , washed with 5ml AcOH, and concentrated in vacuo yield an oily residue of crude 27 AcOH salt. This material was taken up with 20 ml water and the pH adjusted to 10 with Na2CO3 solution, followed by extraction 3 times with 15ml EtOAc. The combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried (Na2SO ), and concentrated yielding protected amine-coupling component 47 in the form of a white foamy material.
SCHEME M
Figure imgf000040_0001
Nitro and carboxylic acid starting materials (e.g. 48) were dissolved in DCM and N.N-DMF (10:1). lJ'-carbonyldiimidazole (1.2 equiv) was added, and the reaction stirred at rt for 5 h. Ammonium hydroxide (2 equiv) was then added. After stirring overnight at rt, the reaction was concentrated, washed with base and extracted with EtOAc to yield compound 49. Compound 49 was then hydrogenated at 40 psi on the PARR shaker in the presence of Pd/C catalyst. Filtration and concentration yielded the appropriate Z-amine coupling s same or similar
method was used to make
Figure imgf000040_0002
and
SCHEME N
Figure imgf000040_0003
53 54 55 To a solution of compound 51 in 20 mL of pyridine was added toluenesulfonyl chloride. The solution was stirred for 18h at 80°C and cooled to rt and concentrated. The precipitate was taken up with water, filtered, and washed with water. The solid was then crystallized from EtOAc to give compound 52 as white needle crystals. To a solution of compound 52 in 20 mL of N,N-DMF was added 0.79 g (6.1 mmol) of DJPEAand 1.13 g (6.1 mmol) of iodoacetamide at rt. The solution was stirred for 24 h and then poured into 100 mL of water and stirred for 1 h. The solid was collected and dried under vacuum to yield compound 53. Compound 53 was taken up with 20 mL DCM and 1.2 g (6J mmol) of trifluoroacetic anhydride was added at rt. The resulting solution was stirred for 5 h at rt and concentrated. The residue was taken up with EtOAc and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give compound 54 as a white solid. MS, m/z (M+l)+ = 289.
The resulting compound 54 was dissolved in EtOAc and Pd/C catalyst was added. The mixture was placed on the PARR shaker at 40 psi for 2h. Filtering off the catalyst yielded the desired compound 55 in 80% yield.
SCHEME O
Figure imgf000042_0001
To a solution of 4-bromo-3-fluorotoluene (2.0 g, 10.58 mmol) in CC14 (40 ml) at RT was added NBS (2.0g). The reaction was heated to reflux and benzoylperoxide
(128 mg, 0.53 mmol) was added three times (total 384 mg) in 30 minute intervals. The reaction was cooled to RT, diluted with DCM (40 ml) and washed with sat.
NaHCO3 (2x). The organics were dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to isolated 56 (2.8 g crude).
To a solution of compound 56 (2.8 g, -10.4 mmol) in DMF (45 ml) under nitrogen at RT was added BOC2NH (3.4 g, 15.7 mmol) followed by KOtBu (1.76g, 15 J mmol). After a mild exotherm, the reaction was stirred at rt for 72 hr. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc (200 ml) and washed with IN HC1, water, sat.
NaHCO3 and brine. Organics were dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. Purification by flash chromatography (silica gel, 2%-15% EtOAc in hexane) provided compound 57 (1.56g). MS (M+Na)+ = 426, 428 (Br isotopic pattern).
To a solution of 57 (1.56g, 3.84 mmol) in nitrogen degassed DMF (1% water, 20 ml) was added Pd(dba)3 (70.3 mg, 0.077 mmol), DPPF (95.9 mg, 0.173 mmol) and Zn(CN)2 (315 mg, 2.69 mmol). The reaction mixture was degassed with nitrogen for 30 minutes, sealed and heated at 110 °C for 20 hours. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc (100 ml) and filtered through a plug of celite which was then washed with EtOAc (2x50 ml). The eluent was then placed in a separatory funnel and washed with water (3x150 ml). The water layers were back extracted in the order generated. The combined EtOAc extracts were dried over MgSO , filtered and concentrated.
Purification by flash chromatography (silica gel, 0 to 15% EtOAc in hexane) provided 58a (0.7 lg) and 58b (0.45 g).
To a solution of acetohydroxamic acid (135 mg, 1.8 mmol) in DMF (5 ml) at RT was added KOtBu (1.0M THF, 1.8 ml, 1.8 mmol). A gelatinous suspension formed which was aggitated until well mixed. The suspension was allowed to set at RT for 5 minutes and then a solution of 58b (450 mg, 1.8 mmol) in DMF (15 ml) was added. The reaction was aggitated at RT for 20 hours. The reaction mixture was then diluted with EtOAc (150 ml) and washed with water (2x) and brine (lx). The organics were dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated. Crystallization from CH2C12 /hexane gave compound 59 (240 mg). MS (M+H)+ = 264
Compound 59 (240 mg) was treated with 10%TFA/CH2C12 (5 ml) at RT for 3 hours. Solvents were removed and the residue was taken up with MeOH and added to a plug of Dowex 50W-X2 (H form, 10 g) resin. The resin captured amine was washed with MeOH, DCM and CH3CN. Elution with 2M NH3 in MeOH (60 ml) followed by concentration gave Z-amine coupling component 60. (170 mg). SCHEME P
Figure imgf000044_0001
61 a 61 b 62
To a solution of 3-amino-5-nitrobenzisoxazole (200 mg, 1J2 mmol, lit. WO/0027627) in DCM (5 ml) was added BOC2O (536 mg, 2.46 mmol) followed by DMAP (20 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred overnight. Solvent was removed and purification by flash chromatography (silica gel, CH C12 ) gave a mixture of compounds 61a and 61b (350 mg combined).
The mixture of 6ja and 61b (307 mg combined) was taken up in EtOH (10 ml) and treated with SnCl2.2H2O (751 mg). The reaction was heated to 70° C for 1.5 hours. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc (75 ml), water (50 ml) and sat. NaHCO3 (25 ml). The layers were mixed and allowed to separate. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated. Purification by RP Prep HPLC provided BOC-protected amine-coupling component 62. (101 mg). MS (M+H)+ = 250.
Utility
The inventive compounds are inhibitors of the activated coagulation serine proteases known as Factor Vila, Factor LXa, Factor Xa, Factor Xla, and thrombin and also inhibit other serine proteases, such as trypsin, tryptase, and urokinase. Thus, the compounds are useful for treating or preventing those processes, which involve the production or action of Factor NLIa, Factor LXa, Factor Xa, Factor Xla, thrombin, trypsin, and/or tryptase. In view of their urokinase inhibitory activity, they are useful as metastasis inhibitors in treating cancer. As used herein with reference to the utilities described below, the term "treating" or "treatment" encompasses prevention, partial alleviation, or cure of the disease or disorder. In view of their above-referenced serine protease inhibitory activity, the inventive compounds are useful in treating consequences of atherosclerotic plaque rupture including cardiovascular diseases associated with the activation of the coagulation cascade in thrombotic or thrombophilic states. Such diseases include arterial thrombosis, coronary artery disease, acute coronary syndromes, myocardial infarction, unstable angina, ischemia resulting from vascular occlusion cerebral infarction, stroke and related cerebral vascular diseases (including cerebrovascular accident and transient ischemic attack). Additionally, the compounds are useful in treating or preventing formation of atherosclerotic plaques, transplant atherosclerosis, peripheral arterial disease and intermittent claudication. In addition, the compounds can be used to prevent restenosis following arterial injury induced endogenously (by rapture of an atherosclerotic plaque), or exogenously (by invasive cardiological procedures such as vessel wall injury resulting from angioplasty).
In addition, the inventive compounds are useful in preventing venous thrombosis, coagulation syndromes, deep vein thrombosis (DNT), disseminated intravascular coagulopathy, Kasabach-Merritt syndrome, pulmonary embolism, cerebral thrombosis, atrial fibrillation, and cerebral embolism. The compounds are useful in treating peripheral arterial occlusion, thromboembolic complications of surgery (such as hip replacement, endarterectomy, introduction of artificial heart valves, vascular grafts, and mechanical organs), implantation or transplantation of organ, tissue or cells, and thromboembolic complications of medications (such as oral contraceptives, hormone replacement, and heparin, e.g., for treating heparin-induced thrombocytopenia). The inventive compounds are useful in preventing thrombosis associated with artificial heart valves, stents, and ventricular enlargement including dilated cardiac myopathy and heart failure. The compounds are also useful in treating thrombosis due to confinement (i.e. immobilization, hospitalization, bed rest etc.).
These compounds are also useful in preventing thrombosis and complications in patients genetically predisposed to arterial thrombosis or venous thrombosis (including activated protein C resistance, FNieiden, Prothrombin 20210, elevated coagulation factors FNFI, FNHI, FLX, FX, FXI, prothrombin, TAFI and fibrinogen), elevated levels of homocystine, and deficient levels of antithrombin, protein C, and protein S. The inventive compounds may be used for treating heparin- intolerant patients, including those with congenital and acquired antithrombin in deficiencies, heparin-induced thrombocytopenia, and those with high levels of polymoφhonuclear granulocyte elastase.
The present compounds may also be used to inhibit blood coagulation in connection with the preparation, storage, fractionation, or use of whole blood. For example, the compounds may be used to maintain whole and fractionated blood in the fluid phase such as required for analytical and biological testing, e.g., for ex vivo platelet and other cell function studies, bioanalytical procedures, and quantitation of blood-containing components. The compounds may be used as anticoagulants in extracoφeal blood circuits, such as those necessary in dialysis and surgery (such as coronary artery bypass surgery); for maintaining blood vessel patency in patients undergoing transluminal coronary angioplasty, vascular surgery including bypass grafting, arterial reconstruction, atherectomy, vascular graft and stent patency, tumor cell metastasis, and organ, tissue, or cell implantation and transplantation.
In view of their tryptase inhibitory activity, the inventive compounds are useful as anti-inflammatory agents, in treating chronic asthma, allergic rhinitis, inflammatory bowel disease, psoriasis, conjunctivitis, atopic dermatitis, pancreatis, rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, septic shock, and chronic inflammatory joint diseases, diseases of joint cartilage destruction, and/or vascular damage due to bacterial and/or viral infections. Additionally, the inventive compounds may be useful for treating diabetic retinopathy or motor neuron diseases such as amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, progressive muscular atrophy, and primary lateral sclerosis. Additionally, the inventive compounds may be useful for tissue remodeling diseases and for treating plaque instability and sequelli. In addition, these compounds may be useful for treating fibrotic diseases and conditions, for example, fibrosis, scleroderma, pulmonary fibrosis, liver cirrhosis, myocardial fibrosis, neurofibromas, and hypertrophic scars. In addition, the compounds of the present invention are useful in treating cancer and preventing the prothrombotic complications of cancer. In view of their metastasis inhibition activity, the compounds are useful in treating tumor growth, as an adjunct to chemotherapy, and for treating diseases involving metastases including, but not limited to cancer, more particularly, cancer of the lung, prostate, colon, breast, ovaries, and bone. These compounds may also be useful in preventing angiogenesis.
The inventive compounds may also be used in combination with other antithrombotic or anticoagulant drugs such as thrombin inhibitors, platelet aggregation inhibitors such as aspirin, clopidogrel, ticlopidine or CS-747, warfarin, low molecular weight heparins (such as LONENOX), GPIIb/GPLIIa blockers, PAI-1 inhibitors such as XR-330 and T-686, inhibitors of α-2-antiplasmin such as anti-α-2- antiplasmin antibody and thromboxane receptor antagonists (such as ifetroban), prostacyclin mimetics, phosphodiesterase (PDE) inhibitors, such as dipyridamole or cilostazol, PDE inhibitors in combination with thromboxane receptor antagonists/thiOmboxane A synthetase inhibitors (such as picotamide), serotonin-2- receptor antagonists (such as ketanserin), fibrinogen receptor antagonists, hypolipidemic agents, such as HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors, e.g., pravastatin, simvastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin, cerivastatin, AZ4522, itavastatin (Nissan/Kowa), and compounds disclosed in U.S. provisional applications No. 60/211,594 filed June 15, 2000, and No. 60/211,595 filed June 15, 2000; microsomal triglyceride transport protein inhibitors (such as disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,739,135, 5,712,279 and 5,760,246), antihypertensive agents such as angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors (e.g., captopril, lisinopril or fosinopril); angiotensin-JJ receptor antagonists (e.g., irbesartan, losartan or valsartan); and/or ACE/NEP inhibitors (e.g., omapatrilat and gemopatrilat); β-blockers (such as propranolol, nadolol and carvedilol), PDE inhibitors in combination with aspirin, ifetroban, picotamide, ketanserin, or clopidogrel and the like. The inventive compounds are also useful in combination with anti-arrhythmic agents such as for atrial fibrillation, for example, amiodarone or dofetilide. The inventive compounds may be used in combination with prothrombolytic agents, such as tissue plasminogen activator (natural or recombinant), streptokinase, reteplase, activase, lanoteplase, urokinase, prourokinase, anisolated streptokinase plasminogen activator complex (ASP AC), animal salivary gland plasminogen activators, and the like.
The inventive compounds may also be used in combination with β-adrenergic agonists such as albuterol, terbutaline, formoterol, salmeterol, bitolterol, pilbuterol, or fenoterol; anticholinergics such as ipratropium bromide; anti-inflammatory cortiocosteroids such as beclomethasone, triamcinolone, budesonide, fluticasone, flunisolide or dexamethasone; and anti-inflammatory agents such as cromolyn, nedocromil, theophylline, zileuton, zafirlukast, monteleukast and pranleukast.
The inventive compounds may also be useful in combination with other anticancer strategies and chemotherapies such as taxol and/or cisplatin.
The compounds may act synergistically with one or more of the above agents. For example, the inventive compounds may act synergistically with the above agents to prevent reocclusion following a successful thrombolytic therapy and/or reduce the time to reperfusion. Thus, reduced doses of thrombolytic agent(s) may be used, therefore minimizing potential hemorrhagic side effects.
The compounds of formula I may be administered by any means suitable for the condition to be treated, which may depend on the need for site-specific treatment or quantity of drug to be delivered. Systematic treatment is typically preferred for cancerous conditions, although other modes of delivery are contemplated. The compounds may be delivered orally, such as in the form of tablets, capsules, granules, powders, or liquid formulations including syrups; sublingually; bucally; transdermally; parenterally, such as by subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular or intrasternal injection or infusion (e.g., as sterile injectable aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions); nasally such as by inhalation spray; rectally such as in the form of suppositories, or in the form of liposome particles. Dosage unit formulations containing non-toxic, pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles or diluents may be administered. The compounds may be administered in a form suitable for immediate release or extended release. Immediate release or extended release may be achieved with suitable pharmaceutical compositions or, particularly in the case of extended release, with devices such as subcutaneous implants or osmotic pumps.
Exemplary compositions for oral administration include suspensions which may contain, for example, microcrystalline cellulose for imparting bulk, alginic acid or sodium alginate as a suspending agent, methylcellulose as a viscosity enhancer, and sweeteners or flavoring agents such as those known in the art; and immediate release tablets which may contain, for example, microcrystalline cellulose, dicalcium phosphate, starch, magnesium stearate and/or lactose and/or other excipients, binders, extenders, disintegrants, diluents and lubricants such as those known in the art. The inventive compounds may be orally delivered by sublingual and/or buccal administration, e.g., with molded, compressed, or freeze-dried tablets. Exemplary compositions may include fast-dissolving diluents such as mannitol, lactose, sucrose, and/or cyclodextrins. Also included in such formulations may be high molecular weight excipients such as celluloses (ANICEL®) or polyethylene glycols (PEG); an excipient to aid mucosal adhesion such as hydroxypropyl cellulose (HPC), hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose (HPMC), sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (SCMC), and/or maleic anhydride copolymer (e.g., GAΝTREZ®); and agents to control release such as polyacrylic copolymer (e.g., CARBOPOL 934®). Lubricants, glidants, flavors, coloring agents and stabilizers may also be added for ease of fabrication and use.
Exemplary compositions for nasal aerosol or inhalation administration include solutions which may contain, for example, benzyl alcohol or other suitable preservatives, absoφtion promoters to enhance absoφtion and/or bioavailability, and/or other solubilizing or dispersing agents such as those known in the art.
Exemplary compositions for parenteral administration include injectable solutions or suspensions which may contain, for example, suitable non-toxic, parenterally acceptable diluents or solvents, such as mannitol, 1,3-butanediol, water, Ringer's solution, an isotonic sodium chloride solution, or other suitable dispersing or wetting and suspending agents, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides, and fatty acids, including oleic acid.
Exemplary compositions for rectal administration include suppositories which may contain, for example, suitable non-irritating excipients, such as cocoa butter, synthetic glyceride esters or polyethylene glycols, which are solid at ordinary temperatures but liquefy and/or dissolve in the rectal cavity to release the drug.
The effective amount of a compound of the present invention may be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art. The specific dose level and frequency of dosage for any particular subject may vary and will depend upon a variety of factors, including the activity of the specific compound employed, the metabolic stability and length of action of that compound, the species, age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the subject, the mode and time of administration, rate of excretion, drag combination, and severity of the particular condition. An exemplary effective amount of compounds of formula I may be within the dosage range of about 0.1 to about 100 mg/kg, preferably about 0.2 to about 50 mg/kg and more preferably about 0.5 to about 25 mg/kg (or from about 1 to about 2500 mg, preferably from about 5 to about 2000 mg) on a regimen in single or 2 to 4 divided daily doses.
Enzyme Assays
Compound was prepared as a 5 mM stock in DMSO, diluted further in DMSO and added directly to the assays. The DMSO concentration for all these studies was less than 1% and compared to DMSO vehicle controls.
Human Factor NLIa was obtained from Enzyme Research Labs (Cat.# HFNJJA 1640). Human recombinant tissue factor (LΝΝONLΝ from Dade Behring Cat.# B4212-100; "20 ml vial") was diluted with 8 ml of H2O per vial and diluted further 1:30 into the 302 μl final assay volume. Tissue factor activated FNLIa enzymatic activity was measured in a buffer containing 150 mM ΝaCl, 5mM CaCl , 1 mM CHAPS and 1 mg/ml PEG 6000 (pH 7.4) with 1 nM FNLIa and 100 μM D-he-Pro- Arg-AFC (Enzyme Systems Products, Km > 200 μM) 0.66% DMSO. The assay (302 μl total volume) was incubated at RT for 2 hr prior to reading fluorome-ric signal (Ex 405 / Em 535) using a Victor 2 (Wallac) fluorescent plate reader.
Human Factor LXa (American Diagnostica # 449b) enzymatic activity was measured in a buffer containing 50 mM Tris, 100 mM CaCl2, 5 mM CaCl2, 33% ethylene glycol at pH 7.5 using 96-well microtiter plates (Nunc # 439454). The enzyme was incubated with the inhibitor at RT for three minutes prior to starting the reaction with 500 uM Spectrozyme FLXa (American Diagnostica #299). The Kmfor this substrate is estimated by American Diagnostica to be 1.3 mM. Time dependent optical density change was followed at 405 nm using a kinetic microplate read (Molecular Devices Spectramax Plus) at RT. Enzyme activity in the presence of inhibitor was expressed as fraction of a DMSO-containing control and curve fit to the equation: activity = control activity/(l+[Lj/IC5o) using Excel Fit.
Human FXa (Calbiochem #233526) enzymatic activity was measured in a buffer containing 0.145 M NaCl, 0.005 M KCl, 1 mg/ml Polyethylene Glycol (PEG- 8000), 0.030 M HEPES (pH 7.4) using 96-well microtiter plates (Nunc Immuno
#439454). The enzyme was incubated with the inhibitor at RT for three minutes prior to starting the reaction with 100 μM S-2222 (phenyl-He-Glu-Gly-Arg-pNA, Km= 137 μM). The Km for this and other substrates was determined experimentally by measuring the enzyme activity at different substrate concentrations and curve fitting the data using Kaleidagraph V. Time-dependent optical density change was followed at 405 nm using a kinetic microplate reader (Molecular Devices UNmax) at RT. Enzyme activity in the presence of inhibitor was expressed as fraction of a DMSO- containing control and curve fit to the equation: activity = control activity/(l + [LJ/IC50) using Excel Fit. Recombinant urokinase (Abbott Labs, Abbokinase) was assayed in the same buffer as FXa, but the reactions were started with 100 μM S-2444 (L-pyroGlu-Gly- Arg-pΝA, Km= 31 μM). Human α-thrombin (Sigma) was measured as for FXa except that the reaction was started with 10 μM S-2238 (D-Phe-Pip-Arg-pΝA, Km = 2.54 μM). Human FXIa assay (Enzyme Research Labs) was measured as for FXa except that the reaction was started with 100 μM S-2366 (L-pyroGlu-Pro-Arg-pNA, Km= 86 μM).
Bovine and human pancreatic trypsin (Sigma) were assayed in 2 mM CaCl2, 50 mM Tris/Cl (pH 8.0) and the reaction was started with 100 μM Chromozym-TRY (Carboxybenzoxy-Nal-Gly-Arg-pNA, Km= 46 μM).
Tryptase inhibition activity was measured using either isolated human skin tryptase or recombinant human tryptase prepared from the human recombinant beta- protryptase expressed by baculovirus in insect cells. The expressed beta-protryptase was purified using sequential immobilized heparin affinity resin followed by an immunoaffinity column using an anti-tryptase monoclonal antibody. The protryptase was activated by auto-catalytic removal of the N-terminal in the presence of dextran sulfate followed by dipeptidyl peptidase I (DPPI) removal of the two N-terminal amino acids to give the mature active enzyme (Sakai et al, J. Clin. Invest.. Vol. 97 (1996), at pp. 988-995). Essentially equivalent results were obtained using isolated native enzyme or the activated expressed enzyme. The tryptase enzyme was maintained in 2M sodium chloride, 10 nM 4-moφholine-propanesulfonic acid, pH 6.8. The assay procedure employed a 96 well microplate. To each well of the microplate (Nunc MaxiSoφ), 250 μl of assay buffer [containing low molecular weight heparin and tris (hydroxymethyl)aminomethane] was added followed by 2.0 μl of the test compound in dimethylsulf oxide. The substrate (10 μl) was then added to each well to give a final concentration of 100 μM benzyloxycarbonyl-glycine-proline- arginine-p-nitroaniline (CBz-Gly-Pro-Arg-pNA). The microplate was then shaken on a platform vortex mixer at a setting of 800 (Sarstedt TPM-2). After a total of three minutes incubation, 10 μl of the working stock solution of tryptase was added to each well. The microplate was vortexed again for one minute and then incubated without shaking at RT for an additional 2 minutes. After this time the microplate was read on a microplate reader (Molecular Devices UN max) in the kinetic mode (405 nm wavelength) over twenty minutes at RT. To determine the compound concentration that inhibited half of the enzyme activity (IC50), the fraction of control activity (FCA) was plotted as a function of the inhibitor concentration and curve to fit FCA/(l[I]/IC5o). The IC50 for each compound was determined 2-4 times and the obtained values were averaged.
Applying the above-described assays, the inventive compounds demonstrated activity as inhibitors of Factors NLIa, LXa, Xa, Xla, LXa, tryptase and/or urokinase.
The following Examples illustrate embodiments of the inventive compounds and starting materials, and are not intended to limit the scope of the claims. For ease of reference, the following abbreviations are used herein: The following Examples illustrate embodiments of the inventive compounds and starting materials, and are not intended to limit the scope of the claims. For ease of reference, the following abbreviations are used herein:
Abbreviations
Me = methyl Et = ethyl
Ph = phenyl
Bn = benzyl t-Bu = tertiary butyl
Boc = tert-butoxycarbonyl CBZ = carbobenzyloxy or carbobenzoxy or benzyloxycarbonyl
THF = tetrahydrofuran
EtOAc = ethyl acetate
DMF = dimethyl formamide i-PrOH = isopropanol DMSO = dimethyl sulfoxide
DME = 1,2 dimethoxyethane
DCE = 1,2 dichloroethane
DCM = dichloromethane
AcOH = acetic acid TFA = trifluoroacetic acid i-Pr2ΝEt = diisopropylethylamine
DMAP = 4-dimethylaminopyridine
NMM = N-methyl moφholine
NaHCO3 = sodium bicarbonate NaBH(OAc)3 = sodium triacetoxyborohydride
Pd/C = palladium on carbon EDC (or EDC.HCl) or EDCI (or EDCI.HCl) or EDAC = 3-ethyl-3'- (dimethylamino)propyl- carbodiimide hydrochloride (or l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)- 3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride)
HOBT or HOBT.H2O = 1-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate HOAT = l-Hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole
Pd(OAc)2 = Palladium acetate
CBZ-C1 = benzyl chloroformate
SAX = Strong Anion Exchanger
SCX = Strong Cation Exchanger PNP = polyvinylpyridine
DCC = dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
DIC or DLPCDI = diisopropylcarbodiimide
DMA = dimethyl acetamide
DIAD = diisopropyl azodicarboxylate DLEA = diisopropylethylamine
DLPEA = diisopropylethylamine
DPPF = l,r-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene
TEA = triethylamine
TBS = t-butyldimethylsilyl Tf = trifluoromethanesulfonyl
L = liter mL = milliliter μL = microliter g = gram(s) mg = milligram(s) meq = milliequivalent rt or RT = room temperature cone. = concentrated sat or sat'd = saturated TLC = thin layer chromatography
HPLC = high performance liquid chromatography
RP HPLC = reverse phase HPLC
LC/MS = high performance liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry
MS or Mass Spec = mass spectrometry MW = molecular weight mp = melting point
EXAMPLES 1 and 2
Figure imgf000055_0001
Figure imgf000055_0003
Compounds having the formula (Ic), wherein X3 and R26 have the values listed in Table 1, were prepared using the following method (weights and percentages are approximate for the compound of Example 2).
Step A:
Figure imgf000055_0002
62.0 mg (0.10 mmol) of Acid-1 , having desired
Figure imgf000056_0001
groups
X3 and R26, 31J mg (0.11 mmol) of 2-(CBZ-amino)-5-aminobenzimidazole, 21 mg (0.10 mmol) of DCC, 10.0 mg HOBT, and 2.0 mg DMAP were dissolved in 3 ml DMF and stirred at RT for 18h. After that time, HPLC indicated a completed reaction. Concentration and purification on Siθ2 using CHCl3/MeOH/water (9:1:0.1) yielded 40J mg of compound 1 A as a white foam. Acid-1 can be prepared as shown in WO 99/41231.
Step B;
40.0 mg (0.052 mmol) of compound 1 A and 10 μl HC1 (cone.) were stirred in 2 ml MeOH for 30 min. at RT, at which time HPLC indicated a completed reaction. Concentration and purification of the residue on 10 g Siθ2 using CHCl3/MeOH/water (8:2:0.1) yielded 33.8 mg (97%) of compound IB as a white foam. Step C: 33 mg (0.044 mmol) of compound IB from Step B, 10 mg Pd/C (10%), and 0.05 ml 1.0 N HC1 in 5 ml dioxane were hydrogenated (balloon pressure with H2) for 12 h. Filtration, concentration, and prep-HPLC purification yielded after lyophilization 20.3 mg (72%) of the desired product as a white powder in the form of its TFA salt. 100% purity by HPLC.
EXAMPLE 3
Figure imgf000057_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000057_0002
l-Ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride (15.5 mg, 0.08 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of 50 mg (0.08 mmol) of Acid-1 from Example 1 (having the desired groups X3 and R26), 9 μL (0.082 mmol) of NMM, 11 mg (0.08 mmol) of 1-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate, and 18 mg (0.08 mmol) of amine coupling component ø-(N-Boc-aminomethyl)aniline (see J. Med. Chem., Nol. 42 (14) (1999) at p. 2504), in 1.5 mL of DCM at 0°C under Ar. The reaction was stirred for two days at rt, concentrated, and taken up in EtOAc and water. The EtOAc was washed with water (2x), dried (sodium sulfate), and concentrated to a glassy residue (69 mg), which was chromatographed over silica gel using 1% MeOH in methylene chloride to give 55 mg of compound 3 A as a glassy residue.
Step B:
Figure imgf000058_0001
A solution of compound 3 A (24 mg, 0.029 mmol), 1.2 mL of DCM, and 0.3 mL of TFA was stirred at RT for 2 h and concentrated, and then concentrated from MeOH (4x) to a residue. Concentrated ammonia (0.5 mL) was added to a solution of the residue in MeOH (0.8 mL). After stirring for 5 min., the solution was diluted with MeOH and concentrated to a residue, which was taken up in EtOAc and water. After two extractions with EtOAc, the combined EtOAc was washed with water, dried (sodium sulfate), and concentrated to give 19 mg of crude product as a clear oily residue. Step 3B was repeated using 26 mg (0.032 mmol) of compound 3A to make another 13 mg of crude compound 3B, and the combined crade product (19 mg and 13 mg) was chromatographed over silica gel using 10% and then 15% MeOH in methylene chloride to give 22 mg of pure compound 3B as a glassy solid.
Step C: A mixture of compound 3B (19 mg, 0.031 mmol), 2.5 mL of MeOH, and 33 μL of 1.0 N HC1 was hydrogenated for 20 min. in the presence of 6 mg of 10% Pd/C. After filtration and concentration of the filtrate, the residue was lyophilized - , „ _-
from dioxane-water to give 16.7 mg of Example 3 as a white solid in the HCl salt form. MS (M+H)+=521.
EXAMPLES 4-6
Figure imgf000060_0001
Compounds of formula (Id) were prepared, wherein Z and s have the values listed in Table 2, using the method recited in Example 3 and the amine-coupling components listed in Table 2.
TABLE 2
Figure imgf000060_0002
EXAMPLE 7
Figure imgf000061_0001
A solution of Acid-1 from Example 1 (having desired groups X3 and R26) (50 mg, 0.085mmol), HOBT (1.48 mg, 0.011 mmol), DCC (23 mg, 0.11 mmol), and DMAP (catalytical amount) was stirred for 10 min. To this solution was added amine coupling component 2-amino-5-aminomethylpyridine (13.5 mg, 0.11 mmol) (see German patent publication DE 430110 Al (1994)). The mixture was stirred overnight and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in 1 mL of MeOH, treated with 0.2 mL of cone. HCl, and stirred for 10 min. MeOH was replaced with THF, and 0.2 mL of 50% NaOH was added. The mixture was stirred overnight, neutralized with cone. HCl, and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in MeOH and filtered. The filtrate was purified with reverse phase Prep HPLC to give 21 mg (83%) of Example 7 as a white solid. MS (M+H)+=491.
EXAMPLES 8-27
Figure imgf000061_0002
Examples 8-27 having Formula (le), above, were prepared wherein the values s and Z are as recited below in Table 3. The compound of Example 8 was prepared in the same manner described above for Example 7, and the compounds of Examples 9- 11 were prepared in the manner described above for Example 3, using an appropriate amine-coupling component. Compounds of Examples 12-27 were synthesized via automation using a TEC AN liquid handler for reagents and starting material addition and Procedures A and B below. The desired amine-coupling components were prepared as set forth in the previous schemes, as known in the field, and/or as set forth in the literature, i.e., see, e.g., Yatsunami et al, S. Eur. Pat. Appl. No. EP 343560 (1989) (Exs. 9, 31); Kraska et al, Pol. J. Chem. Vol. 58 (1984) at p. 1025 (Exs. 10, 12, 13); Kato et.al, PCT Intern. Applic. WO 00/09506 Al (Ex. 19); Beattie et al, L Med. Chem.. Vol. 20 (1977) at p. 718 (Ex. 22); Kawano et al, PCT Intern. Application WO 97/09982 (Ex. 23); and Feng et al, J. Med. Chem., Vol. 40 (1997) at p. 3726 (Ex. 27). Acid-2 was prepared according to procedures shown in WO 99/41231.
Figure imgf000062_0001
Procedure A: for monoprotected diamines
To 33 reaction tubes (12 mm x 65 mm) in a mini-reactor were added 0.5 mL (30 mg, 0.055 mmol, 1 eq) of a stock solution of Acid-2 in C1CH2CH2C1, 0.25 mL (16 mg, 0.083 mmol, 1.5 eq) of a stock solution of EDC in CH2C12, and 0.25 mL (10 mg, 0.083 mmol, 1.5 eq) of a stock solution of DMAP in C1CH2CH2C1. The mini-reactor
Figure imgf000063_0001
was removed and shaken on an orbital shaker for 20 minutes. Amines having the desired groups Z and Rι3 (0.066 mmol, 1.2 eq) were added and the mixture was shaken on an orbital shaker for 3 days.
The reaction mixtures were purified via solid phase extraction using a SCX cation exchange column (CUBCXHL5R3, 500MG/3ML/50PKG) as follows: 1). Columns were conditioned with 1.5 mL of 1:1 CH3CN-iPr2OH solution; 2). Reaction mixture (1 mL) was loaded on to SCX columns; and 3). Columns were eluted with 1.5 mL of 1: 1 CH3CN-iPr OH solution into 9 mm x 80 mm microtubes. The CH3CN-iPr2OH solutions were concentrated using a speed vac for 12h.
(For CBZ-protected amines, the residues were hydrogenated with 5 mg of Pd/C in 2 ml MeOH. After filtration, the MeOH solutions were concentrated to give residues.) The residues were treated with 4 N HCl in 1,4-dioxane, sonicated for 1 min, and loaded on PVP column. The PVP columns were eluted with 3 mL of 1:1 water- 1,4- dioxane solution. The solutions were concentrated using a speed vac for 12 h to give the final products.
Procedure B: for unprotected diamines
To 12 mm x 65 mm reaction tubes in a mini-reactor was added 0.5 mL (30 mg, 0.055 mmol, IT eq) of a stock solution of Acid-2 in C1CH2CH2C1, 11.75 μL (9.5 mg, 0.075 mmol, 1.5 eq) of a stock solution of DIC, and 0.25 mL (10 mg, 0.075 mmol, 1.5 eq) of a stock solution of HO AT in a 5: 1 C1CH2CH2C1-DMA solution. The mini-reactor was removed and shaken on an orbital shaker for 20 min. Amines having the desired groups Z and Rι3 (0.066 mmol, 1.2 eq) and iPr2NEt (19 μL, 14 mg, 2.2 eq.) (or 2 HCl salts), were added, and the mixture was shaken on an orbital shaker for 3 days.
The reaction mixtures were purified via solid phase extraction using a SCX cation exchange column (CUBCXHL5R3, 500MG/3ML/50PKG) as follows: 1). Columns were conditioned with 1.5 mL of 1:1 CH3CN-iPr2OH solution; 2). Reaction mixture (1 mL) was loaded on to SCX columns; 3). Columns were rinsed with 1.5 mL of a 1:1 CH3CN-iPr2OH solution; and
4). Columns were eluted with 1.5 mL of a 2M NH3 MeOH solution into 9 mm x 80 mm microtubes.
TABLE 3
Figure imgf000064_0001
Figure imgf000065_0001
Figure imgf000066_0002
EXAMPLES 28-31
Figure imgf000066_0001
Compounds having the Formula (If) wherein Z has the values in Table 4 were synthesized using the same procedures as described above for Examples 12-27.
TABLE 4
Figure imgf000066_0003
Figure imgf000067_0001
EXAMPLE 32
Figure imgf000068_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000068_0002
To Alltech Filter Tubes (4 mL, 20 micron) was added a mixture of Acid-1 (having desired groups X3 and R26) (58 mg, 0.093 mmol), Boc-aminomethyl-4-aniline (24 mg, 0.11 mmol), DIC (13.84 mg, 0.11 mmol), HO AT (15 mg, 0.11 mmol) and DLEA (35.5 mg, 0.28) in DMF/DCE (1.0/1.0 mL). The reaction tubes were shaken at RT for 4 days. The reaction mixture was concentrated in speed vac to give the desired compound 32 A.
Step B: To compound 32 A was added 40% TFA (6 mL), and the mixture was sonicated for 2 min. and allowed to sit at RT for 3 h.. The solvent was removed in speed vac, and cone. NH OH (0.3 mL) and MeOH (1.0 mL) were added. After concentration in speed vac, the residue was purified on Prep HPLC (YMC S5 ODS 30x100 mm). To the purified intermediate was added 10% Pd/C (15 mg) in MeOH (3 mL), and the solution was stirred at RT under hydrogen (balloon pressure) until the starting material disappeared. The reaction mixture was filtered, cone. NH OH/MeOH (0.3/1.0 mL) was added, and the filtrate was concentrated in speed vac to give the desired product (8.6 mg). MS (M+H)+=521.
EXAMPLE 33
Figure imgf000069_0001
Example 33 was prepared using the same procedure as for Example 32, except 4-aminomethyl aniline (13 mg, 0.11 mmol) was used in place of Boc-aminomethyl-4- aniline to make the corresponding intermediate. To this intermediate was then added 1% cone. HCl in MeOH (6mL), in place of 40% TFA , which was sonicated for 30 seconds and allowed to sit at RT for 30 min. MS (M+H)+=521.
EXAMPLES 34-41
Figure imgf000069_0002
Compounds having the formula (Ig), wherein s and Z have the values listed in Table 5 were prepared in the manner described above for Examples 32 and 33, using an appropriate amine-coupling component.
TABLE 5
Figure imgf000070_0001
EXAMPLE 42
Figure imgf000071_0001
5-aminoindole (13 mg, 0.091 mmol), TEA (13 μL, 0.091 mmol), and a catalytic amount of DMAP and EDCI (18 mg, 0.091 mmol) were added to a solution of Acid-1 (Example 1) where X3 is C and R26 is H (50 mg, 0.085 mmol). After stirring overnight at RT, tetra-butyl ammonium fluoride (0.45 ml, 0.45 mmol) in THF was added to the reaction mixture. The reaction was allowed to stir for 1 h at RT, a KOH solution (1 ml, 1 N) was added, and the reaction was allowed to stir for another 1 h. The reaction was quenched with 1 N HCl (2 ml), extracted with EtOAc (2 x 5 ml). The organic phase was further washed with 1 N HCl (2 x 5 ml) and saturated NaCl solution and dried over MgSO4. The solvent was removed to afford the above product (40.6 mg) as a brown solid.
EXAMPLES 43-49
Figure imgf000071_0002
Compounds having the formula (lh) wherein Z has the values listed in Table 6 were prepared in the manner described above for Example 42, using an appropriate amine-coupling component. TABLE 6
Figure imgf000072_0001
EXAMPLE 50
Figure imgf000073_0001
Example 50 was prepared in the same manner described above for Example 42. MS (M+H)+= 546.
EXAMPLES 51 and 52
Figure imgf000073_0002
Compounds of formula (Ii) were prepared, wherein R3 is ethyl (Example 51) and methyl (Example 52), as follows.
Step A:
Figure imgf000074_0001
To make Compound 51 A wherein R3 is ethyl, a solution of sodium ethoxide in EtOH was added to a THF solution of Compound IB. The mixture was stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was worked up and purified to afford the desired Compound 51 A. To make Compound 51 A wherein R3 is methyl, the same procedure was used using a solution of sodium methoxide in MeOH.
Step B: A solution of Compound 51 A having the desired group R3 was stirred under 1 atmosphere of hydrogen in the presence of 10% Pd/C. After 1 hr, the catalyst was filtered off and the solvent removed to afford the desired compound. MS (M+H)+=575 (Ex. 51); 561 (Ex. 52).
EXAMPLE 53
Figure imgf000074_0002
Step A;
To a mixtu
Figure imgf000075_0001
re of 73 mg of 0J2 mmol) (Acid-3), 35 mg (0.12 mmol) of 2-(CBZ-amino)-5-aminobenzimidazole, 2 mg (0.014 mmol) of 1- hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole, and 30 mg (0J44 mmol) of N,N - dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, were added 0.7 mL of DMF and 1 mg of DMAP. The mixture was stirred for 3 h at RT, stored overnight in the refrigerator, filtered, and concentrated to a residue. The residue was triturated with EtOAc and after filtration, the EtOAc was washed sequentially with water, 5% potassium hydrogen sulfate, water, and brine, dried (sodium sulfate), and concentrated to an oily residue (97 mg). Chromatography of the residue over silica gel using 1-5% MeOH in DCM gave 68 mg of compound 53 A. Acid 3 was prepared according to procedures described in WO 99/41231.
Step B : 65 mg (0.088 mmol) of compound 53 A in a mixture of 1 mL of dioxane, 3 mL of MeOH, 100 μL of 1.00 N HCl, and 22 mg of 10% Pd/C was hydrogenated at 1 atmosphere for 4 h. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated, and the residue was treated with dioxane and water to give 39 mg of Example 53 as a white solid. MS (M+H)+=517.
EXAMPLE 54
Figure imgf000076_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000076_0002
NH,
To a solution of 5 g (35 mmol) of 5-nitro-2-aminopyridine (°2N ) in
Figure imgf000076_0003
concentrated. The precipitate was taken up with water, filtered, and washed with water. The solid was then crystallized from EtOAc to give 4.3 g (40%) of compound 54 A as white needle crystals.
Step B:
Figure imgf000076_0004
To a solution of 1.5 g (5 mmol) of compound 54A in 20 mL of DMF was added 0J9 g (6J mmol) of DLPEA and 1J3 g(6J mmol) of iodoacetamide at rt. The solution was stirred for 24 h and then poured into 100 mL of water and stirred for 1 h. The solid was collected and dried under vacuum. The solid was taken up with 20 mL DCM, and then 1.2 g (6J mmol) of trifluoroacetic anhydride was added at rt. The resulting solution was stirred for 5 h at rt and concentrated. The residue was taken up with EtOAc and washed with sat'd NaHCO3. The organic layer was dried over MgSO and concentrated to give 0.32 g of compound 54B as a white solid. MS, m/z (M+l)+=289.
Step C:
Figure imgf000077_0001
Compound 54B was dissolved in EtOAc and Pd/C catalyst was added. The mixture was placed on the PARR shaker at 40 psi for 2h. Filtering off the catalyst yielded compound 54C in 80% yield.
Step D: Example 54
Compound 54C was coupled to Acid,
Figure imgf000077_0002
, using EDAC,
HOAT, and 4-DMAP in DCM. The resulting product was purified by prep HPLC. The tert-butyl protecting group was removed by treating the compound with TFA in DCM. The trifluoro acetamide protecting group was removed by dissolving the compound in DMSO and adding 10 eq. of solid NaOH. The mixture was stirred for 12 h at rt and purified by prep HPLC to give Example 54.
EXAMPLE 55
Figure imgf000079_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000079_0002
In a solution of DMF (3 mL) were dissolved amine-coupling component 33 from Scheme I (47.0 mg, 0J5 mmol), Acid-1 from Example 1 (93.0 mg, 0J5 mmol) (where X is N and R26 is OCH3), 45 mg (0.22 mmol) DCC, 4 mg HO AT, and 3 mg DMAP. The solution was stirred under Ar at rt for 24h. After that time both the amine and the acid were consumed (HPLC). The reaction mixture was filtered, the filtrate concentrated, and the residue taken up in 5 ml EtOAc to afford a solution of crude compound 55 A. The crude compound was washed with brine (3x3 ml), dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated. The oily residue was purified by column chromatography on 150 g SiO2 using EtOAc/DCM (2:8) and EtOAc/DCM/ LP (2:8:0.2) yielded 90 mg (67 %) of compound 55A as a white foam. Step B:
Figure imgf000080_0001
85 mg (0.93 mmol) of compound 55 A was stirred at rt in 4ml TFA/anisole (1:1) for 24 h. HPLC and LC-mass indicated consumption of 55 A and formation of two new compounds, i.e., 55BJ where R28 = OH (M+H =648) and 55B.2 where R28 OC(=O)CF3 (M+H =744). Concentration and treatment of the residue with ether yielded 85 mg of a white solid of the TFA salts of the mixture with no other side products indicated a 1: 3 mixture for 55BJ and 55B.2.
Step C: Example 55
80 mg of the mixture from Step B was dissolved in 3 ml dioxane and stirred with 1 ml of 1.0 N NaOH for 24 h. At that time LC-mass showed a completed reaction. Concentration and prep-HPLC purification of the residue gave 39 mg of Example 55 in the TFA salt form as a white lyophilate (50.4% over two steps). HPLC-purity 100 %, LR-MS (M+H)+=558
EXAMPLE 56
Figure imgf000080_0002
Step A:
Figure imgf000081_0001
25 mg (0.051 mmol) of Acid-3 from Example 53, 15.4 mg (0.05 mmol) of amine-coupling component 33 from Scheme 1,15 mg (0.07 mmol) DCC, 1 mg HO AT, and 1 mg DMAP were dissolved in 2ml dry DMF and stirred under Ar at rt for 18 h. HPLC indicated a complete reaction. The suspension was filtered and the filtrate washed with 1 ml EtOAc. Concentration of the filtrate and column chromatography of the residue on SiO2 using EtOAc/DCM (2:8) yielded 30 mg of compound 56 A (76.7 %). MS (M+H)+=768.
Step B:
Figure imgf000081_0002
29 mg (0.038 mmol) of compound 56 A was stirred in 2 ml TFA/anisole (1:1) at rt. After N2 protection for 24 h, LC-mass indicated a completed reaction. Concentration and treatment of the residue with ether yielded 25 mg of a beige powder of the crude TFA salt of compound 56B. This material was used without further purification in the next step. Step C; Example 56
24 mg (0.027 mmol) of the TFA salt of compound 56B was stirred in 2 ml dioxane with 1 ml 1.0 N NaOH for 24 h. The reaction was monitored by HPLC/LC- mass. After removal of the solvent in vacuo, the residue was dissolved in solvent B (90%MeOH/10%water, plus 0.1%TFA) and purified by prep-HPLC to yield 13 mg of Example 56 in the TFA salt form as a white lyophilate (64 % yield). MS(M+H)+ =528, HPLC-purity 95 %.
EXAMPLE 57
Figure imgf000082_0001
Step A;
Figure imgf000082_0002
To 10 ml of DCM was added 426.5 mg (1.0 mmol)
Figure imgf000083_0001
and 5 ml of TFA, and the solution was stirred first for 1 h at 0°C and then for 2 h at rt to complete the deprotection. The mixture was concentrated to a colorless oil. The concentration was repeated three times with 3 ml toluene added each time to remove excess TFA to yield 382 mg of compound 57A as a colorless oil. HPLC purity = 100 %. LC-Mas 377.
Step B:
Figure imgf000083_0002
380 mg (OJOmmol) of compound 57 A was dissolved in 15 ml acetonitrile, and to the solution were added Cs CO3 (326 mg, 1.0 mmol), and C2H5I (170mg, 1J0 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 18 h at rt with HPLC-monitoring to complete the reaction. The suspension was filtered and the filter residue washed with 10 ml EtOAc. The combined filtrate was concentrated and the residue dissolved in 30 ml EtOAc. The residue was washed with half brine and brine, dried over Na2SO , and the organic layer was concentrated to yield 398 mg (100%) of compound 57B as a white foam.
Step C:
Figure imgf000084_0001
To 380 mg (0.92 mmol) of compound 57B were added 607 mg (6.7 mmol) of NaClO2, 235 mg (1.83 mmol) of NaH PO4, and 2 ml 2-methylbutene, and the mixture was stirred for 1 h at 0°C in 15 ml of t-BuOH/CH3CN/H2O (6:1:2). The reaction mixture was poured into 30 ml of ice water. The combined organic layers were extracted with EtOAc (3 x 15 ml), washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to yield 382 mg (100%) of compound 57C as a white foam. HPLC- purity 99 %, TR.
Step D:
Figure imgf000084_0002
207 mg (0.50 mmol) of compound 57C, 130 mg (0.50 mmol) of
Figure imgf000084_0003
118 mg (0.55 mmol) of DCC, 20 mg of HOBT, and 10 mg of DMAP were dissolved in 20 ml acetonitrile and stirred at rt. After 24 h, the reaction was completed (per HPLC). Filtration and concentration yielded 307 mg (93.6 %) of crade compound 57D as a white solid. HPLC-purity =83 %. This material was directly used in the next step without further purification. MS (M+H)+ = 656.
Step E; Example 57 Compound 57D was dissolved in 6 ml TFA/DCM and stirred for 4 h at 5°C to complete the deprotection. Concentration and purification of the oily residue of crade product by prep-HPLC yielded 128 mg (47% over two steps) of Example 57 in the TFA salt form HPLC-purity = 100%, MS (M+H) =556.
EXAMPLES 58-69
Figure imgf000085_0001
Compounds having formula (Ij), above, wherein s and Z have the values listed below in Table 7 below, were prepared using the following procedure.
Compounds of Formula (Ic), above.
Figure imgf000085_0002
0.05 mmol
Compound 1 was dissolved in acetonitrile with 2 equivalents of an amine having the desired groups -(CH2)S-Z. EDCI and HOBT were added and the mixture was stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was added to SCX resin, and it was then washed with 1.5 ml of CH3CN and eluted with 1.5 ml of CH3CN/MeOH (1:1). The solvent was removed to afford the compound 2. To compound 2 was added CH2C12 TFA (2: 1), and the mixture was allowed to stand for 2.5 h. After evaporation of the solvent, MeOH and NH OH were added and the compounds of Formula (Ij) were isolated following purification by RP HPLC, using MeOH water as eluent.
TABLE 7
Figure imgf000086_0001
Figure imgf000087_0001
EXAMPLE 70-160
Figure imgf000087_0002
Compounds having the formula (Lk), wherein the groups Rt and R5 have the values listed in Table 8, were prepared using the method of Steps A through I below.
Step A:
Figure imgf000088_0001
tBuOH (90 mL) was added to a flask with 5-formylsalicylic acid
Figure imgf000088_0002
) (4.98 g, 30.00 mmol) and DMAP (150 mg, 1.23 mmol). The salicyclic acid did not completely dissolve. A solution of DCC (6.50 g, 31.50 mmol) in THF (60 mL) was added dropwise over 30 min. After 12 h, Et2O (50 mL) was added followed by anhydrous oxalic acid (4.41 g, 48.98 mmol). After 15 min of stirring, the solids were filtered off. The filtrate was washed with 2.5% NaHCO3 (3X) and sat. NaCl (2X). The solution was dried (MgSO4), filtered, and cone, to give 6.20 g (93% crude) of compound 70A.
Step B:
Figure imgf000088_0003
Pyridine (11.52 mL, 135.10 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 70A
(6.00 g, 27.02 mmol) in DCM (40 mL) at -10°C. A solution of trifluoromethanesulfonic anhydride (9.09 mL, 54.04 mmol) in DCM (lOmL) was added dropwise over 15 min. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1.5 h at -10°C and then stored in the freezer. The next day, the solution was poured into cold H2O (120 mL), then partitioned between EtOAc (250 mL) and H2O (100 mL). The aqueous phase was isolated and extracted with EtOAc (lOOmL). All organic phases were combined and washed with sat. NaCl(2x). The solution was dried (MgSO4), filtered and cone. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography using DCM:Hexane (1:2) to obtain 7.96 g (83%) of compound 70B.
Step C:
Figure imgf000089_0001
2-methyl-2-butene (9.6 mL) was added to a solution of compound 70B (5.66 g, 15.98 mmol) in tBuOH:CH3CN:H2O (6:1:2) (85 mL) at 0°C. NaClO2 (6.21 g, 68.69 mmol) was added in portions over 1 min. After 5 min of stirring, NaH2PO4 H2O (2.65 g, 19.18 mmol) was added in portions over lmin. The reaction mixture was then stirred at rt for 45 min and cold H2O (125 mL) was added. The solution was extracted with EtOAc (2 x 250 mL). The organic extracts were combined and washed with H2O (2x) and sat. NaCl(2x). The solution was dried (MgSO ), filtered, and cone, to give 4.80 g (81 %) of Compound 70C.
Step D;
Figure imgf000089_0002
Compound 70C (4.80 g, 12.96 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (10 mL).
NaHCO3 (1.31 g, 15.55 mmol) was added followed by benzyl bromide (6.17 mL, 51.85 mmol). After 12 h, the reaction mixture was partitioned between EtOAc (250 mL) and H2O (150 mL). The organic phase was isolated and washed with sat. NaCl (1 x). The solution was dried (MgSO ), filtered, and cone. The crade product was purified by flash chromatography using a gradient of 3% to 20% EtOAc in hexane to provide 4.64 g (78%) of compound 70D.
Step E:
Figure imgf000090_0001
Deoxygenated DMF (45 mL) was added to a round bottom flask containing
compound 70D (4.44 g, 9.64 mmol) and stannene
Figure imgf000090_0002
(5.34 g, 12.54 mmol) (see WO 99/41231 and the general procedure for stannylation of pyridine carboxyaldehydes described in J. Heterocyclic Chem.. Nol 31, (1994) at p. 1161.) Powdered CuO (0.77 g, 9.64 mmol) was added followed by dichlorobis- (triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) (0.46 g, 0.65 mmol). The mixture was heated to 110°C. After 1 h, the reaction mixture was cooled to rt. The solution was diluted with EtOAc (45 mL) and filtered through Celite. The filtrate was partitioned between EtOAc (150 mL) and H2O (150 mL). The organic phase was isolated, washed with sat. ΝaCl (100 mL), dried (MgSO ), and cone. The crude material was purified by column chromatography using hexane:DCM (1:2) to obtain 2.71 g (63%) of Compound (70E).
Step F:
Figure imgf000091_0001
The process of Step C, above, was followed, adding 3.65 mL of 2-methyl-2- butene to a solution of compound 70E (2.71 g, 6.06 mmol) in 33 mL of tBuOH:CH3CN:H2O (6: 1:2), and using 2.36 g (26.04 mmol) of NaClO2,L00 g (7.27 mmol) of NaH2PO4 H O, and stirring the reaction for 30 min before adding cold H2O (90 mL). The aq. solution was extracted with EtOAc (150 mL), and the organic extract washed with H2O (2x) and sat. NaCl (2x), dried (MgSO ), filtered, and cone, to give 2.85 g (100%) of compound 70F.
Step G;
Figure imgf000091_0002
(1.52 g, 7.94 mmol) was added followed by DMAP (75 mg, 0.61 mmol). After 3 h, the reaction mixture was partitioned between EtOAc (400 mL) and H2O (300 mL). The aqueous phase was isolated and extracted with EtOAc (100 mL). All organic extracts were combined, washed with sat. NaCl (2x), dried (MgSO ), and cone. The crude product was purified by column chromatography using EtOAc to obtain 3.58 g (85%) of compound 70G.
Figure imgf000092_0001
20% Pd(OH)2 (1.75 g) was added to a solution of compound 70G (3.52 g, 5.07 mmol) in THF (60 mL). The solution was placed on a Parr apparatus at 50 p.s.i. After 48 h, the solution was diluted with THF:MeOH (1:1) and filtered. The catalyst was rinsed several times. The filtrate was cone, to give 1.90 g (62%) of compound 70H.
Step I: Procedures for Examples 70-160 having Formula Ik, above (Table 8)
A TEC AN liquid handler was used to add 35 μL of DMF to each of a number of reaction tubes (12 mm x 65 mm) in a mini -reactor. Then, to each reaction tube was added 144 μL (0.036 mmol) of a 2.5 M solution of an amine in DMF, the amine having the desired groups R4 and R5. Insoluble amines were added by hand. 5J μL (0.037 mmol) of TEA was added by hand to any tubes which contained an amine salt. The TECAN was then used to add 150 μL (18 mg, 0.030 mmol) of a stock solution of scaffold Compound 70H in DMF. This addition was followed by 150 μL of a stock solution containing 5.2 μL (0.033 mmol) of DIC and 4.5 mg (0.033 mmol) of HO At in DMF. The tubes were sealed and shaken for 24 h.
The reaction mixtures were purified by solid phase extraction using a SCX cation exchange column (CUBCXHL5R3, 500 MG/3 ML/ 50 PKG) as follows:
1) Columns were conditioned with MeOH (2 x 1.5 mL);
2) Reaction mixtures were loaded on to SCX columns; 3) SCX columns were washed with MeOH (2 x 1.5 mL) and 0.1 M NH3/MeOH (1.0 mL); 4) Columns were eluted with 2.0 M NH3/MeOH (1.5 mL) into microtubes (9 x 80 mm); and
5) The microtubes were concentrated by speed vac.
0.5 mL of a TFA/DCM (1:2) solution was added to each microtube. The tubes were capped and shaken for 3 h and then concentrated by speed vac. All crude products were purified by PREP HPLC using a gradient of 35 to 100% solvent B (Le., 90%MeOH, 10% H20, with 0.1% TFA), over 5 min at 20 mL/min (column: Shimadzu NP-ODS 20 x 50 mm). Fractions containing products were concentrated by speed vac. Compounds obtained in TFA salt form are reported in Table 8.
TABLE 8
Figure imgf000093_0001
Figure imgf000094_0001
Figure imgf000095_0001
Figure imgf000096_0001
Figure imgf000097_0001
Figure imgf000098_0001
Figure imgf000099_0001
EXAMPLES 161-170
Figure imgf000100_0001
Compounds having the formula (II), wherein the groups R4 and R5 together with nitrogen atom to which they are attached form the optionally-substituted heterocyclic and heteroaryl rings listed in Table 9, were prepared using the method of Examples 70-160 described above.
TABLE 9
Figure imgf000100_0002
Figure imgf000101_0002
EXAMPLE 171
Figure imgf000101_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000102_0001
A mixture of 3.6 g (21 mmol) of 5-formylsalicylic acid, 11 g (65 mmol) of benzylbromide, and 3J g (43 mmol) of NaHCO3 in 40 mL of acetone was stirred for 24 h at reflux, then cooled to rt and concentrated. The residue was taken up with EtOAc and washed with sat'd NaHCO3. The organic layer was dried over Na SO and concentrated to give 3.6 g (65%) of compound 171 A as a pale yellow oil. 1H- NMR (500MHz), 6 11.3 (s,lH,OH), 9.85 (s, IH, CHO), 8.37 (d, IH, ArH), 7.43 (d, IH, ArH), 7.46-7.45 (m, 5H, ArH's), 7.09 (d, IH, ArH), 5.41 (s, 2H, CH2Ph).
Step B:
Figure imgf000102_0002
To a suspension of 4 g (9Jmmol) of isoamyl triphenylphosphonium bromide in 40 mL of THF at -78 °C was added 4.7 mL (1 IJ mmol) of 2.5 M butyllithium in hexane dropwise. The mixture was stirred for 20 min at -78°C, 1 h at 0°C, then recooled to -78 °C. A solution of compound 171 A in 15 mL of THF was added dropwise. The resulting solution was stirred for 1 h at -78°C, then warmed to rt overnight and concentrated. The residue was taken up with EtOAc and washed with brine and 1 NHC1. The organic layer was dried over MgSO and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed over silica gel (EtOAc:hexane, 1:9) to give 0.8 g (66%) of compound 17 IB as a pale yellow oil. 1H-NMR (500MHz), δ 10.6 (IH, s, OH), 7.78 (s, IH, ArH), 7.49 (dd, IH, ArH), 7.44-7.39 (m, 5H, ArH's), 6.90 (d, IH, ArH), 6.25 (d, IH, CH=CH), 6.05 (dt, IH, CH=CH), 5.37 (s, 2H, CH2Ph), 2.08, (dt, 2H, C=CCH2), 1.67 (dq, IH, CHMe2), 0.90 (d, 6H, (CH3)2).
Step C:
Figure imgf000103_0001
To a solution of 0.3 g (0.9mmol) of compound 171B in 20 mL of DCM was added 0.11 g ( 1.1 mmol) of TEA and 0.31 g ( 1.1 mmol) of trifluorosulfonic anhydride at 0°C. The solution was stirred for 4 h at 0°C, warmed to rt overnight, diluted with DCM, and washed with brine and sat'd NaHCO3. The organic layer was dried over MgSO and concentrated. The residue was passed through a short bed of silica gel. The filtrate was concentrated to give 0.35g (85%) of compound 17 IC as a pale yellow oil.
Step D:
Figure imgf000103_0002
A mixture of 0.35g (0.8 mmol) of compound 171C, 0.48 g (IJ mmol) of 6- methoxy-3-tributylstannanyl-pyridine-2-carbaldehyde, 80 mg (0J mmol) of dichloiObis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(fI), and 90 mg (IJ mmol) of cupric oxide in 20 mL of DMF was stirred for 6 h at 80°C. The mixture was cooled to rt, 30 mL of sat'd KF solution was added, and the solution was stirred for 1 h at rt. The mixture was filtered, the filtrate extracted with EtOAc, and the organic layer dried over MgSO and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed over silica gel (EtOAc:hexane, 3:7) to give 0J6 g (47%) of compound 171D. 1H-NMR (400 MHz), δ 9.76 (s, IH, CHO), 8.03 (s, IH, ArH), 7.51 (dd, IH, ArH), 7.37 (d, IH, ArH), 7.28- 7.10 (m, 5H, ArH's), 7.07 (d, IH, ArH), 6.81 (d, IH, ArH), 6.41 (d, IH, CH=), 6.32 (dd, IH, =CH), 5.04 (d, 2H, OCH2), 4.00 (s, 3H, OCH3), 2.11 (m, 2H, =CCH2), 1.73 (m, IH, CHMe2), 0.93 (d, 6H, (CH3)2).
Step E:
Figure imgf000104_0001
To a solution of 80 mg (0.2 mmol) of compound 171D in a 10 mL solution of t-butanol:acetonitrile: water (6:1:2), was added 55 mg (0.60 mmol) of sodium chlorite, 33 mg (0.24 mmol) of NaH2PO4 • H2O, and 0.1 mL of 2-methyl-but-2-ene at 0°C. The solution was stirred for 30 min at 0°C, 2 h at rt, and concentrated. The residue was taken up with EtOAc and washed with brine. The organic layer was dried over MgSO and concentrated to give the above titled compound as a yellow oil. MS, m/z (M+l)+=446. Step F: Example 171
To a solution of the acid from Step E in 5 mL of DCM and 5 mL of DMF was added 25 mg (80 mmol) of Nl-(2.4-dimethoxy-benzyl)-isoquinoline-l,6-diamine, 17 mg (88 mmol) of EDAC, 1 mg (9 mmol) of HO AT, and 1 mg (9 mmol) of DMAP. The solution was stirred for 12 h at rt and concentrated and the residue taken up with 5 mL of anisole and 5 mL of TFA. The solution was then stirred for 18 h at rt and concentrated and the residue taken up with 10 mL of MeOH. Next, 0.2 g (3.5 mmol) of KOH was added to the solution, and it was stirred for 4 h at rt, then neutralized with IN HCl and concentrated. The residue was purified with HPLC using YMC S5 ODS 20X100 column to give 22 mg of Example 171 as a white lyophalate. MS, m/z (M+l)+=497. 1H-NMR (500 MHz), δ 8.32( s, 2H, ArH's), 8.01 (s,lH, ArH), 7.90 (d, IH, ArH), 7.60 (d, IH, ArH), 7.57 (d, IH, ArH), 7.45 (d, IH, ArH), 7.17 (d, IH, ArH), 7.09 (d, IH, ArH), 7.06 (d, IH, ArH), 6.47 (d, IH, CH=C), 6.38 (dt, IH, C=CH), 4.09 (s, 3H, CH3), 2.13 (m, 2H, =CCH2), 1.68 (m, IH, CHMe2), 0.90 (d, 6H, (CH3)2).
EXAMPLE 172
Figure imgf000105_0001
Step A;
Figure imgf000106_0001
To a solution of 6.5 g (36 mmol) of 5-formyl-2-hydroxy-benzoic acid methyl ester in 80 mL of benzene was added 0.68 g of toluenesulfonic acid and 4.5 g (43 mmol) of 2,2-dimethyl-l,3-propanediol at rt. The solution was stirred for 6 h at reflux with continuous removal of water, then cooled to rt and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed with silica gel (EtOAc:hexane, 1:9) to give 5.3 g (55%) of compound 172 A as a pale yellow oil.
Step B:
Figure imgf000106_0002
To a solution of 5.3 g (20 mmol) of compound 172A was added 6.3 g (22 mmol) of trifluoromethylsulfonic anhydride and 2.3 g (22 mmol) of TEA. The solution was stirred for 18 h at rt and washed with brine and sat'd NaHCO3 solution. The organic layer was dried over MgSO and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed over silica gel (EtOAc:hexane, 1:9) to give 6.5 g (77%) of compound 172B as a dark oil. 1H-NMR (400 MHz), δ 8.21 (d, IH, ArH), 7.78 (dd, IH, ArH), 7.30 (d, IH, ArH), 5.43 (s, IH, OCHO), 3.97 (s, 3H, OCH3), 3.79 (d, 2H, OCH2), 3.66 (d, 2H, OCH2), 1.27 (s, 3H, CH3), 0.82 (s, 3H, CH3).
Step C:
Figure imgf000107_0001
A mixture of 6.5 g (16.3mmol) of compound 172B, 7.6 g (17.9 mmol) of 6- methoxy-3-tributylstannanyl-pyridine-2-carbaldehyde, 1.3 g (1.79 mmol) of dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II), and 1.4 g (17.9 mmol) of cupric oxide in 40 mL of DMF was stirred for 6 h at 80°C. The mixture was cooled to rt, then 50 mL of sat'd KF solution was added and the solution stirred for 1 h. The mixture was filtered, the filtrate extracted with EtOAc, and the organic layer was dried over MgSO and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed over silica gel (EtOAc:hexane, 3:7) to give 2.8 g (44%) of compound 172C. 1H-NMR (500 MHz), δ 9.81 (s, IH, CHO), 8.19 (d, IH, ArH), 7.71 (dd, IH, ArH), 7.41 (d, IH, ArH), 7.22 (d, IH, ArH), 6.94 (d, IH, ArH), 5.47 (s, IH, OCHO), 4.05 (s, 3H, OCH3), 3.79 (d, 2H, OCH2), 3.67 (d, 2H, OCH2), 3.66 (s, 3H, OCH3), 1.27 (s, 3H, CH3), 0.81 (s, 3H, CH3). Step D:
Figure imgf000108_0001
To a solution of 0.37 g (0.96 mmol) of compound 172C in a 20 mL solution of t-butanol:acetonitrile: water (6:1:2) was added 0.26 g (2.8 mmol) of sodium chlorite, 0.13 g (0.96 mmol) of NaH2PO4 • H2O, and 0.1 mL of 2-methyl-but-2-ene at 0°C. The solution was stirred for 30 min at 0°C, 2 h at rt, and concentrated. The residue was taken up with EtOAc and washed with brine. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give 0.30 g (78%) of compound 172D as a yellow oil. MS, m/z (M+l)+=402.
Step E; Example 172
To a solution of compound 172D in 10 mL of DCM and 10 mL of DMF was added 0J5 g (1.2 mmol) of 3-amino-benzamide, 0.22 g (1.2 mmol) of EDAC, 15 mg (0.12 mmol) of HO AT, and 14 mg (0.12 mmol) of DMAP at rt. The solution was stirred for 12 h at rt and concentrated. The residue was then taken up with 20 mL of MeOH and 0.2 g (3.5 mmol) of KOH was added. The solution was stirred for 4 h at rt, neutralized with IN HCl and concentrated. The residue was purified with HPLC using YMC S5 ODS 20X100 column to give 53 mg of Example 172 as a white lyophilate. MS, m z (M+l)+=506. 1H-NMR (500 MHz), δ 9.86 (s, IH, NH), 8.13 (s, IH, ArH), 8.01 (S, IH, ArH), 7.72 (dd, IH, ArH), 6.67 (d, IH, ArH), 7.53 (d, IH, ArH), 7.45 (d, IH, ArH), 7.35 (dd, IH, ArH), 7.28 (d, IH, ArH), 6.96 (d, IH, ArH), 5.36 (s, IH, OCHO), 4.04 (s, 3H, OCH3), 3.79 (d, 2H, OCH2), 3.68 (d, 2H, OCH2), 1.28 (s, 3H, CH3), 0.80 (s, 3H, CH3). EXAMPLE 173
Figure imgf000109_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000109_0002
2 g (7.8 mmol) of compound 171 A from Example 171 was dissolved in 20 mL DCM with IJ mL (1 IJ mmol) TEA. A solution of 1.97 mL (11.7 mmol) triflic anhydride in 15 mL DCM was slowly added to the phenol solution at 0°C. The solution was stirred at rt overnight and washed with a sat'd solution of NaHCO3. The organic layer was dried and concentrated and the product purified by column chromatography (EtOAc/hexane, 3:7) to give 2J g (90%) of compound 173A. 1H NMR (500 MHz), δ 10.14 (s, IH, CHO), 8.65 (s, IH), 8.23 (d, IH), 7.58-7.43 (m, 6H), 5.53 (s, 2H, CH2).
408- Step B
Figure imgf000110_0001
2.7 g (7.0 mmol) of compound 173 A was mixed with 2.9 g (7.0 mmol) of 6- methoxy-2-tributylstannyl-pyridine-3-carbaldehyde 492 mg (0.7 mmol) of PdCl2(PPh3)2, and 553 mg (7.0 mmol) of cupric oxide in 20 mL N,N-DMF. The reaction was refluxed at 115°C for 5 h. The mixture was cooled to rt and 20 mL of a sat'd solution of KF was added. The reaction was stirred for one hour at rt and then concentrated, and the residue was taken up in EtOAc and extracted with water. The organic layer was dried and concentrated. The product was chromatographed over silica gel (EtOAc/hexane, 3:7) to yield 347 mg (15%) of compound 173B.
Step C:
Figure imgf000110_0002
347 mg (0.92 mmol) of compound 173B together with 0.04mL (0.65 mmol) ethylene glycol, and 25 mg(0J3 mmol) p-Tos-OH was dissolved in 20 ml benzene. The mixture was stirred at reflux (85°C) for 10 min. and was cooled to rt. The above product was chromatographed over silica gel (EtOAc/hexane, 3/7) to yield 175 mg (45%) of compound 173C.
Step D:
Figure imgf000111_0001
To a suspension of 224 mg (0.54 mmol) isoamyl triphenylphosphonium bromide in 20 mL THF was added 0.3mL (0.5 mmol) 1.6 M of butyl lithium in hexanes at -78°C. The suspension was stirred for one hour at 0°C until it became a solution. A solution of 175 mg (0.42 mmol) of compound 173C in 10 mL THF was then added to the ylid solution at 0°C and stirred for 1 h. The reaction was concentrated and the residue taken up in EtOAc and washed with a sat'd NaCl solution. The organic layer was dried and concentrated and the product purified by column chromatography (1/4 EtOAc/Hexane) to give 120 mg (60%) of the desired cis product. The ethylene glycol protecting group was removed by dissolving the compound in 20 mL THF/H2O (10: 1) and adding several drops of IN HCl. The mixture refluxed at 70°C for 1 h and was concentrated. The residue was taken up in EtOAc and washed with a sat'd solution of NaHCO3. The organic layer was dried and concentrated to yield compound 173D.
Step E; Example 173
The aldehyde from Step D was oxidized to a carboxylic acid by dissolving 115 mg (0.27 mmol) of the aldehyde, 97 mg (1.07 mmol) of sodium chlorite, and 0J3 mL of (1.21 mmol) 2-methyl-2-butene in 15 mL t-BuOH/CH3CN/H2O (6: 1:2) at 0°C. After a solution formed, 56 mg (0.40 mmol) of NaH2PO4*H2O was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at rt and diluted with water. The organic layer was extracted with EtOAc, dried and concentrated to give a quantitative yield of the desired acid. The acid was then coupled to the 1 -amino isoquinoline amine coupling component and deprotected as described in Example 171, step F, to give Example 173. 1H NMR (500 MHz), confirmed the cis product: δ 8.25 (s, IH, ArH), 8.24 (d, IH, ArH), 7.90 (s, IH, ArH), 7.85 (d, IH, ArH), 7.53 (d, IH, ArH), 7.38 (d, IH, ArH), 7.37 (d, IH, ArH), 7J4 (d, IH, ArH), 6.99 (d, IH, ArH), 6.97 (d, IH,' ArH), 6.45 (d, IH, CH), 5.74 (m, IH, CH), 4.05 (s, 3H, OCH3), 2.20 (m, 2H, CH2), 1.66 (m, IH, CH), 0.88 (d, 6H, 2CH3).
EXAMPLE 174
Figure imgf000112_0001
Step A;
Figure imgf000112_0002
A mixture of 2 g (8Jmmol) of methyl 2-bromo-5-methylbenzoate, 1.86 g (10.4 mmol) of NBS, and 0.25 g (1.0 mmol) of benzoyl peroxide in 20 mL of CC14 was stirred for 2h at reflux, cooled to rt and diluted with DCM. The solution was washed with sat'd NaHCO3. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed over silica gel (EtOAc: hexane, 1:9) to give 1.75 g (65%) of the compound 174A as a white solid. 1H NMR (500 MHz), δ7.80 (d, IH, ArH), 7.62 (d, IH, ArH), 7.34 (dd, IH, ArH), 4.42 (s, 2H, CH2Br), 3.93 (s, 3H, CH3).
Step B;
Figure imgf000113_0001
To a solution of 215 mg (2.44mmol) of neopentyl alcohol in 10 mL N,N-DMF was added 97 mg (4.05 mmol) of NaH. The mixture was stirred at rt for l/2h until a solution formed. A solution of 500 mg (1.62 mmol) of compound 174A in 10 mL N,N-DMF was added and the mixture stirred at rt for 12 h and concentrated. The residue was taken up with EtOAc and washed with a sat'd solution of NaCl. The organic layer was dried over MgSO and concentrated to give 170 mg (33%) of the coupled product. 1H NMR (500 rnHz) δ 7.87 (s, IH, ArH), 7.63 (d, IH, ArH), 7.33 (d, IH, ArH), 4.42 (s, 2H, CH2), 3.04 (s, 2H, CH2), 1.17 (s, 9H, 3CH3). To convert the benzoic acid to the above-titled protected methyl ester, the benzoic acid was dissolved in MeOH. Hydrochloric acid gas was bubbled into the solution. The flask was capped, the solution stirred for 4 h at rt, and the product concentrated under vacuum overnight. MS, m z (M+l)+=316.
Step C:
Figure imgf000114_0001
A mixture of 170 mg (0.54 mmol) of compound 174B, 230 mg (0.54 mmol) of stannene (see Ex. 70, step 70E), 43 mg (0.54 mmol) cupric oxide, and 38 mg (0.054 mmol) of PdCl2(PPh3)2 was dissolved in 10 mL of N,N-DMF, deoxygenated, and stirred at 115°C for 4h. The reaction mixture was cooled to rt and 10 mL of a sat'd solution of KF was added. The solution was stirred for lh, and then the reaction was concentrated and taken up in EtOAc and extracted. The organic layer was dried over MgSO and concentrated to give 360 mg (82%) of crude compound 174C.
Step D: Example 174
Compound 174C was converted to the corresponding 2-carboxylic acid using standard conditions. The acid was then coupled to the aminobenzimidazole amine- coupling component as in Example 70, step 70b, and deprotected using the DCM LLFA, (1 : 1) and saponification to give Example 174. IH NMR (500 MHz), δ 7.98 (s, IH, ArH), 7.86 (s, IH, ArH), 7.56 (d, IH, ArH), 7.53 (d, IH, ArH), 7.25 (d, IH, ArH), 7.21 (d, IH, ArH), 7.02 (d, IH, ArH), 4.58 (s, 2H, CH2), 4.09 (s, 3H, OCH3), 3.19 (s, 2H, CH2), 0.94 (s, 9H, 3CH3).
EXAMPLE 175
Figure imgf000115_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000115_0002
250 mg (1.02 mmol) of methyl 2-bromo-5-methoxybenzoate, 433 mg (1.02 mmol) of stannene (see Ex. 173, step C), 70 mg (0.10 mmol) of PdCl2(PPh3)2, and 80.6 mg (1.02 mmol) of cupric oxide were dissolved in 15 mL N,N-DMF. The mixture was deoxygenated and stirred at 115°C for 5 h. The reaction was cooled to it and 15mL of a sat'd solution of KF was added. The reaction was stirred at rt for 1 h, concentrated, and the residue was taken up in EtOAc and extracted. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to yield the above aldehyde.
Step B: Example 175
100 mg (0.33 mmol) of the aldehyde from Step A was oxidized to a carboxylic acid using conditions as described in Example 173, Step F. The acid was coupled to the amino benzimidazole amine-coupling component and deprotected following step D of Example 174 to give Example 175. 1H NMR (500 MHz), δ 7.78 (s, IH, ArH), 7.47 (s, IH, ArH), 7.45 (d, IH, ArH), 7.18 (d, IH, ArH), 7.17 (d, IH, ArH), 7.06 (d, IH, ArH), 7.05 (d, IH, ArH), 6.92 (d, IH, ArH), 3.99 (s, 3H, OCH3), 3J7 (s, 2H, OCH3).
EXAMPLE 176
Figure imgf000116_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000116_0002
A mixture of OJ g (2.2 mmol) of 5-benzyloxy-2-bromo-benzoic acid methyl ester [prepared according to Hoarau et al, Synthesis, Nol. 5 (2000) at pp. 655-66)], 0.93 g (2.2 mmol) of stannene (see step 173C), 0J5 g (0.2 mmol) of PdCl2(PhPh3)2, and 0J7 g (2.2 mmol) of cupric oxide in 20 mL of Ν, Ν-DMF was stirred for 6 h at 80°C. The mixture was cooled to rt and 30 mL of sat'd KF solution was added. The mixture was stirred for lh at rt and then filtered. The filtrate was extracted with EtOAc, and the organic layer dried over MgSO and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed over silica gel (EtOAchexane, 3:7) to give 0.51 g (61%) of compound 176A. 1H ΝMR (400 MHz), δ 9.83 (s, IH, CHO), 7.67 (d, !H, ArH), 7.46- 7.32 (m, 7H, ArH's), 7J5 (dd, IH, ArH), 6.94 (d, IH, ArH), 5J3 (s, 2H, CH2O), 4.07 (s, 3H, OCH3), 3.64 (s, 3H, OCH3). Step B:
Figure imgf000117_0001
400 mg (1.06mmol) of compound 176A was oxidized to the corresponding 2- carboxylic acid and the acid was then coupled to the amino benzimidazole amine- coupling component following step D of Example 174 to provide compound 176B.
Step C; Example 176
Compound 176B was deprotected with KOH in MeOH and water and subsequently TFA in DCM to provide Example 176. 1H NMR (500 MHz), 57.78- 6.91(13H, ArH's), 5.06 (s, 2H, CH2), 3.99 (s, 3H, OCH3).
EXAMPLE 177
Figure imgf000118_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000118_0002
Compound 176B was hydrogenated at 40 psi in the presence of Pd/C catalyst overnight to remove the benzyl group to provide compound 177 A.
Step B: Example 177
10 mg (0.018 mmol) of compound 177A was dissolved in 10 mL of acetone with 4 mg (0.028 mmol) potassium carbonate and 6 mg (0.036 mmol) of 1-bromo- 3,3-dimethyl butane. The mixture was stirred at reflux (65°C) overnight and concentrated. KOH in MeOH and water were added to the reaction which was then stirred for several hours. Purification by prep HPLC yielded Example 177. MS, m/z (M+l)+=504. EXAMPLE 178
Figure imgf000119_0001
Compound 177 A was treated with KOH in MeOH and water to give Example 178 above. MS, m/z (M+l)+=420.
EXAMPLE 179
Figure imgf000119_0002
Step A:
Figure imgf000119_0003
To a suspension of ester
Figure imgf000120_0001
(2.0 g, 6.15 mmol) in
DCM (50 ml) at -78 °C was added a solution of DLBAL in DCM (1.0M, 35 ml). The mixture was stirred at -78 °C for 1 h, warmed to rt and quenched with the addition of
MeOH (5 ml) and 1 N HCl (5 ml). The mixture was diluted with EtOAc, washed with brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to give compound 179 A (1.50 g) as a yellow solid. LC-MS: (M+H)+=298.
Step B:
Figure imgf000120_0002
To a suspension of alcohol 179 A (900 mg, 3.0 mmol) in DCM (25 mL) was added Br2PPh3 and the resulting mixture was stirred at RT for 4.5 h. The solvent was removed to give the bromide 179B as a semi-solid.
Step C:
Figure imgf000120_0003
To a solution of crade 179B in toluene (20 ml) was added triphenylphosphine
(945 mg, 3.6 mmol). The mixture was heated at 60°C for 1 h. Ethyl ether (20 ml) was added, and the solid was collected by filtration, washed with ethyl ether, EtOAc, THF, 10% DCM/ethyl ether and acetonitrile to give compound 179C (915 mg) as a light gray solid. Step D:
A mixture of trifla
Figure imgf000121_0001
te ( 1.0 g, 2. H mmol) (compound 201 A),
Figure imgf000121_0002
(1.46 g, 3.42 mmol), CuO (168 mg, 2.11 mmol) and
PdCl2(PPh3)2 (130 mg) in DMF (10 ml) was degased and heated at 105°C for 1 h. HPLC showed completion of the reaction. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc (100 ml), washed with 1 N HCl, saturated NaHCO3 solution, brine, dried (MgSO ) and concentrated to give the crade product. Purification of the crade product by flash column chromatography (silica, 10-30% EtOAc/hexane) gave 179D (915 mg) as a yellow solid.
Step E;
Figure imgf000121_0003
To a suspension of 179C (203 mg, 0.33 mmol) in THF (6.0 ml) at -78°C was added NaHMDS (1.0 M in THF, 730 μl). The mixture was stirred at -78 °C for 30 min and then stirred at -30 °C for 10 min. A solution of 179D (140 mg, 0.3 mmol) in THF (2 ml) was added, and the mixture was slowly warmed to rt during 1 h and stirred at rt for 30 min. The mixture was then diluted with EtOAc, washed with water, brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to give the crude product as a yellow foam (220 mg). The crude product contained both trans and cis isomers. After storing at room temperature for 5 days, the crade product (120 mg) was recrystalhzed from MeOH to give 179E (18 mg) as a yellow solid.
Step F: Example 179
A mixture of 179E (12 mg, 0.016 mmol), Pd/C (10%, 2 mg) and 1 N HCl solution (20 μl) in dioxane (1.5 mL) was stirred under hydrogen atmosphere
(hydrogen balloon) at rt for 5 h. HPLC indicated completion of the reaction. The reaction mixture was filtered through a celite cake, evaporated and lyophalized to give Example 179 (5.6 mg) as a white fluffy powder. HPLC: 91% purity; MS: (M+H)+=527.
EXAMPLE 180
Figure imgf000122_0001
The above compound was prepared using the procedure to prepare Example 171, except 2,6-Diamino-benzoimidazole-l-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester was used in Step F. MS, m/z, (M+l)+=486. 1H-lHNMR(400MHz), δ7.96 (d, IH, ArH), 7.87 (d, IH, ArH), 7.58 (d, IH, ArH), 7.38 (dd, IH, ArH), 7.27 (2s, 2H, ArH's), 7.21(d, IH, ArH), 7.03 (d, IH, ArH). 6.52 (d, IH, CH=), 5.81 (dt, IH, =CH), 4.11 (s, 3H, OCH3), 2.27 (m, =CCH2), 2.75 (m, IH, =CCCH), 0.95 (d, 6H, 2(CH3)2).
EXAMPLE 181
Figure imgf000123_0001
A mixture of 5 mg of Example 180 and 10 mg of Pd/C in 20 mL of MeOH was hydrogenated at 40 psi for 3 h and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated and the residue purified with HPLC using YMC S5 ODS 20X100 column to give 2 mg of Example 181. MS, m/z (M+l)+=486. 1H-lHNMR(400MHz), δ7.65 (s, IH, ArH),7-.54 (s, IH, ArH), 7.46 (d, IH, ArH), 7.14 (d, IH, ArH), 7.07 (2s, 2H, ArH's), 6.97 (d, IH, ArH), 6.84 (d, IH, ArH), 3.94 (s, 3H, OCH3), 2.52 (t, 2H, ArCH2), 1.50 (m, 2H, ArCCH2), 1.49 (m, IH, ArCCCCH), 1.05 (m, 2H, ArCCCH2), 0.71 (d, 6H, 2(CH3)2).
EXAMPLE 182
Figure imgf000124_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000124_0002
To a solution of 3-hydroxy-4-fluorobenzoic acid (2.1 g, 13.45 mmol) in DCM
(50 mL) was added 2,2-dimethylpropylamine (1.76 g, 20.2 mmol), DIC (2.53 mL, 16 mmol), and HOAT (2.2 g, 16 mmol). The mixture was stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl ether (50 mL) and filtered. The filtrate was washed with IN HCl solution, sat'd NaHCO3 and water, then dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to give the crude product which was purified by flash chromatography (30-50% EtOAc/hexane) to give compound 182A (3.0 g, 99% yield).
Step B:
Figure imgf000124_0003
To a solution of compound 182A (3.0 g, 13.3 mmol) in DCM (30 mL) was added pyridine (5.4 mL, 67 mmol) and triflic anhydride (4.48 mL, 26.6 mmol) at 0°C. The mixture was stirred at rt for 1 h. The reaction was quenched with the addition of water (50 mL) at 0°C and extracted with EtOAc. The extracts were combined and washed with IN HCl solution, sat'd NaHCO3 and brine, then dried (MgSO ) and concentrated to give the crude product which was purified by flash chromatography (20-30% EtOAc/hexane) to give compound 182B (4.42 g, 93% yield) as a light yellow oil.
Step C:
Figure imgf000125_0001
A mixture of compound 182B (4.1 g, 11.5 mmol), MeOH (10 mL), TEA (3.2 mL), DPPF (380 mg) and Pd(OAc)2 in DMF was heated at 60°C for 4 h with the bubbling of carbon monoxide. The reaction was cooled to rt, quenched with water (50 mL) and extracted with ethyl ether (5 x 50 mL). The extracts were combined and washed with IN HCl solution, sat'd NaHCO3 and brine, then dried (MgSO ) and concentrated to give the crude product. Purification by flash chromatography (20- 30% EtOAc/hexane) gave compound 182C (2J g, 68% yield) as a white solid.
Step D:
Figure imgf000125_0002
A mixture of compound 182C (120 mg, 0.45 mmol),
Figure imgf000125_0003
(130 mg, 0.68 mmol) and DIPEA (1.0 mL) in DMSO (2.0 mL) was heated at 120°C for 3 days. The reaction was then cooled to rt and diluted with EtOAc, washed with water (50 mL) and brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to give the crude product. The crude product was purified by RP preparative HPLC. The purified product was collected, concentrated, neutralized with sat'd bicarbonate solution, and extracted with EtOAc. The extracts were combined and concentrated to give compound 182D (72 mg, 36% yield).
Step E:
Figure imgf000126_0001
To a solution of compound 182D (70 mg, 0J6 mmol) in CH C12 (1.6 mL) was added TFA (0.8 mL). The mixture was stirred at rt for 5 h. The solvent and excess TFA were removed under vacuum to give the crude product. The crade product was dissolved in MeOH and passed through a PNP resin column to give compound 182E (60 mg).
Step F:
Figure imgf000126_0002
A mixture of compound 182E (30 mg, 0.077 mmol), 2-(CBZ-amino)-5- aminobenzimidazole (24 mg, 0.085 mmol), DCC (18 mg, 0.085 mmol), HOAT (5 mg) and DMAP (several crystals) in DMF (2 mL) was stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (10-20% MeOH/ CH2C12) to give compound 182F (45 mg).
Step G: Example 182
A mixture of compound 182F (42 mg, 0.064 mmol), IN HCl (64 μL, 0.064 mmol), Pd/C (10%, 10 mg) in MeOH (2 mL) was stirred under hydrogen atmosphere (hydrogen balloon) at rt for 2 h. LC-MS indicated the completion of the reaction. The reaction mixture was filtered through a 4 μ microfilter and concentrated to give Example 182 (35 mg) as a yellow solid.
EXAMPLE 183
Figure imgf000127_0001
50% NaOH solution (0.5 mL) was added to a solution of Example 182 (35 mg) in MeOH THF/H2O (3:1:1, 2 mL). The mixture was stirred at rt for 2.5 h. LC- MS indicated the reaction was complete and then the reaction mixture was neutralized to pH = 5 using 6 N HCl and concentrated to give the crude product. Purification of the crude product by RP preparative HPLC yielded Example 183 (24 mg, TFA salt) as a white powder. MS: (M+H)+=507. EXAMPLES 184-190
Figure imgf000128_0001
The compounds of Examples 184-190, having the formula (Im) above wherein the groups — L-(CHR2)-X (Ri)- together have the values shown in Table 10, were prepared following the same or similar procedure as in Examples 182 and 183, using an appropriate amine in Step D.
TABLE 10
Figure imgf000128_0002
Figure imgf000129_0003
EXAMPLE 191
Figure imgf000129_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000129_0002
Compound 70C from Example 70 (6.00 g, 16.2 mmol) was treated with neopentylamine (1.9 mL, 16.2 mmol) following the procedure described for the preparation of compound 3 A in the synthesis of Example 3. Chromatography on silica gel (hexane-EtOAc, 75:25) provided 6.04 g of compound 191 A as a white solid.
Step B:
Aldehyde
Figure imgf000130_0001
(6.36 g, 16.0 mmol) (see Ex. 207, step A) was converted to the carboxylic acid upon treatment with sodium chlorite as described for the preparation of compound 70C in Example 70 to afford 7.71 g of the acid as an oil. The acid (7.70 g, 16 mmol) was mixed with 30 mL of DMF, cesium carbonate (2.61 g, 8 mmol), and methyl iodide (1.2 mL, 19.2 mmol) . The mixture was stirred for 17 h and then diluted with EtOAc and water. The EtOAc was washed with water (2x), dilute sodium thiosulfate (2x), and water (2x), dried (sodium sulfate), and concentrated to an oil. Chromatography of the oil over silica gel using hexane-EtOAc (first 80:20, then 75:25) afforded 4.90 g of the methyl ester (compound 19 IB) as an oil.
Step C:
Figure imgf000130_0002
A mixture of compound 191B (4.90 g, 11.5 mmol) and 2.90 g of 77% pure 3- chloroperoxybenzoic acid in 70 mL of DCM was stirred for 19 h and then concentrated to a residue, which was taken up in EtOAc. The EtOAc was washed with dilute NaHCO3 (2x) and water (4x), dried (sodium sulfate), and concentrated to give 5.09 g of crude compound 191C as an oil.
Step D:
Figure imgf000131_0001
Treatment of compound 191 A (3.45 g, 7.85 mmol) and 19 IC (4.03 g, 9.11 mmol) with dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(LI) and powdered copper (TT) oxide in DMF as described for the preparation of compound 70E in the synthesis of Example 70 gave 6.93 g of crude compound 19 ID, which was chromatographed over silica gel using 1-4% MeOH in DCM to give 2.42 g of compound 19 ID as a white amorphous solid.
Step E:
Figure imgf000131_0002
Trifluoroacetic anhydride (1.4 mL, 10 mmol) was added to compound 191D (443 mg, 1 mmol) in 3 mL of DMF and the solution was stirred for 19 h at rt. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue taken up in EtOAc. The EtOAc was washed with water (2x), cautiously with dilute NaHCO3 (2x), and water (2x), dried (sodium sulfate), and concentrated to give 525 mg of crade compound 191E as a yellow oil.
Step F:
Figure imgf000132_0001
A mixture of crude compound 19 IE above (523 mg) in THF (3 mL), water (2 mL), and 4.5 mL of 1 N NaOH was stirred at rt for 7 hours, acidified with 1 N HCl, and concentrated to a wet residue, which was taken up in EtOAc and water. After three extractions with EtOAc, the aq. layer and suspended solids were extracted with a small amount of chlorofoim (2x). The combined organic extracts were washed with water (3x), dried (sodium sulfate), and concentrated to give 351 mg of compound
19 IF as an amorphous white solid.
Step G:
Figure imgf000133_0001
Compound 19 IF (257 mg, 0.60 mmol) was treated with amine-coupling component from Scheme X (212 mg, 0.58 mmol) in DMF as described for compound 194D in Example 194 to provide 217 mg of compound 19 IG as an amorphous residue after chromatography on silica gel using 2-5% MeOH in DCM.
Step H:
Figure imgf000133_0002
A mixture of compound 191G (21.5 mg, 0.03 mmol), N- phenyltrifluoromethylsulfonimide (
Figure imgf000133_0003
mg, 0.03 mmol), 0.6 mL
DCM, and TEA (5 μL, 0.036 mmol) was stirred overnight at rt. Additional DCM (0.5 mL) was added along with TEA (5 μL, 0.036 mmol), and the reaction was stirred for
20 h longer and diluted with DCM. The DCM was washed with water (2x), dried
(sodium sulfate), and concentrated to a residue, which was chromatographed over silica gel using 1-2% MeOH in DCM to give 14 mg of compound 19 IH as a glassy residue. Step I:
Figure imgf000134_0001
A mixture of compound 191H (14 mg, 0.016 mmol), tributyl(vinyl)tin (6 μL,
0.02 mmol), copper (II) oxide (1.3 mg, 0.02 mmol), 0.5 mL of degassed DMF, and 0.8 mg of dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II) was stirred at 110 °C for one hour, cooled, and filtered using EtOAc. The filtrate was washed with water (4x), dried (sodium sulfate), and concentrated to a residue, which was chromatographed over silica gel using 1-2% MeOH in DCM to give 9 mg of compound 1911 as a glassy residue.
Step J: Example 191
TFA (0.3 mL) was added to a mixture of compound 1911 (9 mg, 0.012 mmol) in anisole (7 μL, 0.06 mmol). The reaction was stirred for 3 h, diluted with several drops of water, and concentrated to a residue, which was applied in MeOH to a column of SCX resin. After washing with MeOH, the column was eluted with 2 M ammonia in MeOH. Concentration of the eluate gave a solid which was dissolved in DCM and several drops of TFA. Concentration of the mixture gave a residue, which was triturated with ether to give 6 mg of Example 191 in the TFA salt form as a solid. MS (M+H)+=524. EXAMPLE 192
Figure imgf000135_0001
Treatment of compound 191G from Example 191 (10.2 mg, 0.014 mmol) with TFA and anisole as described in the last step of Example 191 afforded 6 mg of Example 192 in the TFA salt form as a solid. MS (M+S)+=514. A tautomeric form of Example 192 wherein the lower keto group (=O) is replaced with hydroxy (-OH) may exist in the presence of some solvents or under different physiological conditions.
EXAMPLE 193
Figure imgf000135_0002
Figure imgf000135_0003
PPh3 (22.0 mg, 0.084 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 19 IG from Example 191 (20.0 mg, 0.028 mmol) in THF (110 μL). EtOH (10.0 μL, 0.168 mmol) was added followed by DIAD (17.0 μL, 0.084 mmol). After 3 h, the reaction mixture was placed on top of a SCX cation exchange column (CUBCXHL3R3, 300 MG) which had been conditioned with MeOH (1.5 mL). The column was washed with MeOH (3 x 1.5 mL) and then eluted with 2.0M NH3/MeOH (1.5 mL). The filtrate was cone, to give 21 mg (100%) of Example 193A.
Step B: Example 193
TFA (150 μL) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of compound 193 A (21.0 mg, 0.028 mmol) in DCM (200 μL) and anisole (25 μL). After 3 h, the reaction mixture was placed on top of a SCX cation exchange column (CUBCXHL3R3, 300 MG) which had been conditioned with MeOH (1.5 mL). The column was washed with MeOH (2 1.5 mL) and then eluted with 2.0M NH3/MeOH (1.5 mL). The filtrate was cone, and placed under vacuum. The residue was dissolved in DCM:TFA (3:1). The solution was cone, and the residue dissolved in MeOH. The solution was cone, and placed under vacuum to give 13.7 mg (74%) of Example 193 as the TFA salt. MS (M+H)+ =542.
EXAMPLE 194
Figure imgf000137_0001
Step A:
Compound 194 A was pre
Figure imgf000137_0002
pared from (3 -hydroxybenzaldehyde) as described: G. M. Kesera, et al., Tetrahedron, Nol. 48 (1992), at pp. 913-922.
Step B:
Figure imgf000137_0003
Compound 194A (154 mg, 0.60 mmol), compound
Figure imgf000138_0001
(284 mg,
0.60 mmol) (see WO 99/41231), potassium phosphate (191 mg, 0.90 mmol), and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (21 mg, 0.018 mmol) in 2.5 mL of degassed
DMF were heated at 100°C for 40 min., cooled, diluted with ice-cold water, and extracted with EtOAc. The EtOAc was washed with brine (2x), dried (MgSO4), and concentrated to an oil, which was chiOmatographed over silica using 3-5% EtOAc in
DCM to give 208 mg of compound 194B as an amorphous solid.
Step C:
Figure imgf000138_0002
Treatment of compound 194B (202 mg, 0.377 mmol) with sodium chlorite as described for the preparation of compound 70C in Example 70 afforded 216 mg of crude compound 194C as a white solid.
Step D:
Figure imgf000138_0003
A mixture of compound 194C (83 mg, 0J5 mmol), amine-coupling component from scheme K (39 mg, 0J5 mmol), HOAT (2 mg, 0.015 mmol), EDAC (38 mg, 0.20 mmol), and DMAP (lmg, 0.008 mmol) in 0.8 mL of DMF was stirred for 17 h at rt and diluted with EtOAc and water. After extraction with EtOAc (2x), the EtOAc was washed with brine (3x), dried (sodium sulfate), and concentrated to an oil which was chromatographed on silica gel using 1% MeOH in DCM to provide 63 mg of compound 194D as an amorphous residue.
Step E: Example 194
A mixture of compound 194D (23 mg, 0.029 mmol), THF (800 μL), water (60 μL), and 1 N NaOH (145 μL) was stirred at rt for 22 hours, acidified to pH 2 with 1 N HCl, and concentrated to a gum. MeOH, water, and TFA were added and the solution was concentrated to a gum, which was triturated with water to give 7.8 mg of Example 194, above, in the TFA salt form as a solid. MS (M+H)+=592.
EXAMPLE 195
Figure imgf000139_0001
Compound 194D from Example 194 (37 mg, 0.047 mmol) was hydrogenated in 1.4 mL of MeOH and 0.4 mL of dioxane in the presence of 12 mg of 10% Pd/C for 21 h at one atmosphere. The catalyst-containing precipitated product was collected by filtration and stirred with 2.5 mL of MeOH and several drops of TFA and filtered. Concentration of the filtrate gave a glassy residue, which dissolved in DCM and several drops of TFA and stirred for one hour. Concentration of the solution afforded 12.4 mg of compound Example 195 in the TFA salt form as an amorphous solid. MS (M+H)+=502. EXAMPLE 196
Figure imgf000140_0001
Treatment of Example 195 (10 mg, 0.016 mmol) in 1 mL of MeOH and 0.4 mL of ether with excess etheral diazomethane for 1 h provided 9.3 mg of Example 196 as a glassy residue.
EXAMPLE 197
Figure imgf000140_0002
A mixture of compound 196 (9 mg, 0.014 mmol), 0.4 mL of THF, 30 μL of water, and 70 μL of 1.0 N NaOH was stirred for 4 h, acidified to pH 1.5 with 1.0 N HCl and concentrated to a gum, which was triturated with water to give 3.7 mg of Example 197 in the HCl salt form as a solid. MS (M+H)+=516.
EXAMPLE 198
Figure imgf000141_0001
Step A;
Figure imgf000141_0002
Compound 194C from Example 194 (294 mg, 0.533 mmol) was treated with amine-coupling component X from Scheme xx (167 mg, 0.533 mmol) in DMF, using the method described for the preparation of compound 194D in Example 194 but substituting DCC for EDAC. After chromatography on silica gel using 1-2.5% MeOH in DCM, 311 mg of Compound 198 A (311 mg) was obtained as a foamy residue.
Step B:
Figure imgf000141_0003
A solution of compound 198A (49 mg, 0.06 mmol) in 0.6 mL of MeOH, 0.4 mL of THF, and 18 μL of 0.5 N sodium methoxide in MeOH was stirred for 18 h at rt. An additional 0.5 N sodium methoxide in MeOH (12 μL) was added and the reaction was refluxed for one hour. After neutralization with acetic acid, the reaction was concentrated and chromatographed over silica gel using 1-2.5% MeOH in DCM to give 26 mg of compound 198B as an amorphous residue.
Step C: Example 198
Compound 198B (24 mg, 0.0324 mmol) was hydrogenated in 1 mL of THF and 1 mL of MeOH in the presence of 8 mg of 10% Pd/C at one atmosphere for one hour to give, after concentration from THF, 21.5 mg of Example 198 as an amorphous solid.
EXAMPLE 199
Figure imgf000143_0001
EtOH (4.0 μL, 0.065 mmol) was added to a solution of Example 198 (19.0 mg, 0.037 mmol) and PPh3 (19.4 mg, 0.074 mmol) in DMF (300 μL). DIAD (14.6 μL, 0.074 mmol) was added. After 24 h, the reaction mixture was placed on top of a SCX cartridge (300 mg) which had been conditioned with MeOH (2 x 1.5 mL). The column was washed with MeOH (2 x 1.5 mL) and the product eluted with 2.0 M NH3 MeOH (1.5 mL). The eluant was concentrated to give 12J mg (63% - crade yield) of Example 199.
EXAMPLE 200
Figure imgf000143_0002
IN NaOH (0.20 mL) was added to a solution of Example 199 (22.0 mg, 0.040 mmol) in THF (0.45 mL) and H2O (50 μL). After 12 h, the reaction mixture was directly purified by PREP HPLC using a gradient of 0 tol00% solvent B (9: 1 MeOH/H20 with 0.1 %TFA) over 8 min at 20 mL/min (column: YMC S5 ODS (20 x 100 mm)). 2.8 mg (11%) of Example 200 was obtained in the form of the TFA salt. Ms (M+H)+ = 530. EXAMPLE 201
Figure imgf000144_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000144_0002
(2.08 g, 10.9 mmol) in THF (100 ml) was added
triflate
Figure imgf000144_0003
(4.01 g, 9.92 mmol) followed by HOAT (1.49g, 10.9 mmol). CH2C12 (30 ml) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 1 h. Neopentyl amine (3 ml) was added followed by iPr2NEt (3 ml) and the reaction was stirred overnight. Product was extracted into EtOAc (200 ml) which was washed sequentially with IN HCl:Brine (1: 1, 200 mlx2) and sat'd NaHCO3 (200mlx2). The aqueous layers were back-extracted in the order generated with EtOAc (200ml). The combined EtOAc extracts were dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated. Flash filtration through silica gel eluting with CH2C12 provided compound 201 A (4.12 g). MS/(M+H)+ = 474.35.
Step B:
Figure imgf000145_0001
To a solution of compound 201 A (700 mg, 1.48 mmol) in nitrogen degassed dry DMF (10 ml) was added 3-formylthiophene-2-boronic acid (230 mg, 1.48 mmol), Pd(PPh3) (86 mg, 0.07 mmol), and K3PO4 (788 mg, 3.7 mmol). The reaction was degassed with nitrogen for 30 minutes, sealed and then heated to 95°C for 6 h. The reaction was partitioned between EtOAc (75 ml) and water (75 ml). The organic layer was separated, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to a brown residue. Purification by flash chromatography (Biotage silica cartridge 40S with a step gradient of 0-15-25% EtOAc in hexane) provided compound 201B (380 mg).
Step C:
Figure imgf000145_0002
To a solution of compound 201B (380 mg, 0.87 mmol) in tBuOH:CH3CN:H2O (6: 1:2, 20 ml) was added 2-methyl-2-butene (2 ml), NaH2PO4.H2O (144 mg, 1.04 mmol) and lastly NaClO2 (394 mg, 4.36 mmol). The reaction was stirred at rt for 6 h. Reaction was partitioned between EtOAc and IN HCkbrine (1:1). The organic layer was separated, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to provide compound 201C (390 mg). (M+H)+ = 452.31.
Step D:
Figure imgf000146_0001
To a solution of compound 201D (30 mg, 0.067 mmol) in THF:CH2C12 (2:3, 2.5 ml) was added EDC (17 mg, 0.088 mmol), HOAt (12 mg, 0.088 mmol), and DMAP (11 mg, 0.088 mmol), followed by 2-(CBZ-amino)-5-aminobenzimidazole (20 mg, 0.7 mmol) and iPr2NEt (200 μL). The reaction was stirred overnight at rt. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc (-10 ml) and washed with sat'd NaHCO , water and brine. The EtOAc extract was dried over MgSO , filtered and concentrated. Purification by preparative HPLC (YMC ODS S5 C18 20x100 mm, 20-100%B, 10 min grad, 2 min. hold, 20 ml/min: A = 10%MeOH/Water + 0J%TFA, B = 90%MeOH/Water + 0J%TFA) gave compound 201D. (M+H)+ = 716.39.
Step E: Example 201
Compound 20 ID was taken up in THF (2.5 ml) and treated with cyclohexadiene (0.5 ml) and 10%Pd/C (40 mg). The reaction mixture was aggitated at rt for 6 hours. The reaction mixture was then filtered through a plug of celite and the plug was washed with THF. The eluent was reduced under vacuum to provide Example 201 (5.5 mg). (M+H)+ = 492.07.
EXAMPLES 202-206
Figure imgf000147_0001
Compounds having the formula (In) wherein "B" has the values listed in Table 11 were prepared following the same procedure described in Example 201 and previous examples and schemes.
TABLE 11
Figure imgf000147_0002
EXAMPLE 207
Figure imgf000148_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000148_0002
Compound 207A was prepared using the general procedure for the stannylation of pyridine carboxaldehydes described in J. Heterocyclic Chem , Vol. 31 , (1994), at p. 1161. To a solution of N,N,N'-trimethylethylenediamine (6.12 ml, 48 mmol) in THF (150 ml) at -78°C was added 2.0M nBuLi (22 ml, 44 mmol). Approximately 15 min. later, 2-pyridinecarboxaldehyde (4.3 g, 40 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at -78 °C for 15 min. A second portion of 2.0 M nBuLi (40 ml, 80 mmol) was added and the reaction was stirred at -78 °C for 1.5 h and then -42 °C for 4 h. The reaction was cooled again to -78°C and tributyltin chloride (27.3 g, 84 mmol) was added. The cooling bath was removed and the reaction was allowed to warm to rt. The reaction was quenched by pouring over ice cold brine (200 ml). The product was extracted from the brine with diethylether (300 mlx3). The organic phase was dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. Purification by flash chromatography (silica gel, 0-10% EtOAc/Hexane) gave stannane 207A (7.04g); 1H- NMR: δ 0.86 (t, 9H,; = 7.3), 1.0-1.19 (m, 6H), 1.22-1.35 (m, 6H), 1.4-1.55 (m, 6H), 7.43 (dd, IH,; = 7.2, 4.7), 8.03 (d, 1H = 6.8), 8.73 (d, IH,; = 4.6), 10.06 (s, IH).
Step B:
Figure imgf000149_0001
To a solution of compound 207A (1.41 g, 3.59 mmol) and triflate compound 70D (1.5 g, 3.26 mmol) in nitrogen degassed dry DMF (12 ml) was added PdCl2(PPh3)2 (150 mg, 0.21 mmol) and powdered CuO (190 mg). The reaction was degassed for 5 min, sealed and heated at 110°C for 1.25 h. The reaction was diluted with diethyl ether which was then washed with sat'd NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated. Purification by flash chromatography (silica gel, 0-30% EtOAc in hexanes) gave compound 207B (0.84 g); (M+H)+ = 418.2.
Step C:
Figure imgf000149_0002
Compound 207C was prepared from 207B (0.84 g mg, 2.01 mmol) following the same procedure as in Example 201, step C, scaling the reagents appropriately. (M+H)+ = 434.44.
Step D:
Figure imgf000150_0001
To a solution of compound 207C (0J7g, 0.392 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 ml) at rt was added EDC (0.112 g, 0.589 mmol), HOAT (0.081g, 0.589 mmol) and 1- BOC-2,6-diaminobenzamidazole (0J06 g, 0.431 mmol). The reaction was stirred at rt for 18 h. The reaction was diluted with EtOAc which was then washed with IN HCl and sat'd NaHCO3. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated. Purification by flash chromatography (silica gel, 0-40% EtOAc in CH2C12) provided compound 207D (158 mg). (M+H)+ = 664.28.
Step E:
Figure imgf000150_0002
Compound 207D (158 mg, 0.238 mmol) was disolved in THF (5 ml) and 10%Pd/C (158 mg) was added. Hydrogen was bubbled through the solution for 30 minutes and then the reaction was stirred under H2 (1 arm) for 6 h. The reaction was filtered through celite and the celite pad was washed liberally with THF until no UN active compounds were detected in the eluent. Solvent was removed to give compound 207E (88 mg).
Step F:
Figure imgf000151_0001
To a solution of compound 207E (44 mg, 0.076 mmol) in DMF:acetonitrile (1:1, 1.5 ml) was added EDC (22 mg, 0.114 mmol) and HOAT (32 mg, 0.114 mmol). To this solution was added (s)-tert-leucinol (39 μl, 0.3 mmol). This reaction was stirred overnight at rt. The reaction was partitioned between EtOAc and 0.5Ν HCl. The organic layer was separated, washed with sat'd NaHCO3, dried over MgSO , filtered, and concentrated. Purification by preparative TLC (silica gel, 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) provided compound 207F (8 mg). (M+H)+ = 673.65.
Step G: Example 207
Compound 207F was taken up in 20%TFA CH2C12 and stirred at rt for 3 h.
Solvent was removed and sample was taken up in MeOH (2ml) and treated with NH4OH (0.5 ml) for 1 hour. Solvent was removed and sample was taken up in water (-2 ml) as a suspension and loaded onto a C18 solid phase extraction cartridge (3 g). The cartridge was then washed with water (15 ml), the product eluted with MeOH:acetonitrile (1:1, 6 ml), and the MeOH:acetonitrile eluent reduced under vacuum to give Example 207 (3.1 mg). (M+H)+ = 517.49.
EXAMPLES 208-211
The compounds reported in Table 12 were prepared in a similar fashion to Example 207.
TABLE 12
Figure imgf000152_0001
EXAMPLE 212
Figure imgf000153_0001
Step A:
Figure imgf000153_0002
To a mixture of (24.6 mg, 0.087 mmol),
Figure imgf000153_0003
2-(CBZ-amino)-5-aminobenzimidazole (50 mg, 0.087 mmol) and NaBH(OAc)3 (23.1 mg, 0.109 mmol) in CH2C12 (2 mL), was added AcOH (0.1 mL) at rt, and the mixture was stirred for 2 days. The reaction mixture was diluted with CH2C1 (15 mL) and washed with 10% Na2CO3. The organic layer was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in rotavap to give compound 212A.
Step B:
Figure imgf000154_0001
To crude compound 212A was added 1% HCl/MeOH (5 mL). The mixture was sonicated for 2 min, allowed to sit at rt for 30 min., and concentrated to give compound 212B.
Step C: Example 212
A mixture of compound 212B and 10% Pd C (10 mg) in MeOH (5 mL) was stirred under hydrogen (balloon pressure) for 2 h. The reaction mixture was filtered, rinsed with MeOH, and concentrated to give crude product. Prep HPLC purification (Shimadsu S5 NP-ODS 20x100 mm) afforded Example 212 (6.5 mg, 15%) as a white lyophilate. MS: (M+H)+=533.
EXAMPLES 213-228
Figure imgf000154_0002
Compounds having the formula (lo) listed in Table 13 were prepared using the procedure of Example 193 whereby various alcohols of the formula R^OH were substituted for EtOH.
TABLE 13
Figure imgf000155_0001
Figure imgf000156_0002
EXAMPLE 229
Figure imgf000156_0001
N,N-Dimethylamine (36 μL, 0.072 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 191H (15 mg, 0.018 mmol) in DMSO (225μL). After 24 h of shaking the reaction mixture was placed on top of a 300 mg SCX cation exchange column (CUBCX1HL3R3) which had been conditioned with MeOH (1.5 mL). The column was washed with MeOH (1.5 mL). The product was eluted with 2.0 M NHJMeOH (1.5 mL). The eluant was cone, to give 9.6 mg of (compound 229 A).
Step B: Example 229
TFA (100 μL) was added to a stirred solution of compound 229A (9.6 mg, 0.013 mmol) in DCM (200 μL) at rt. After 2 h of stirring, the reaction mixture was cone, dissolved in MeOH (0.5 mL) and placed on top of a 300 mg SCX cation exchange column (CUBCX1HL3R3) which had been conditioned with MeOH (1.5 mL). The column was washed with MeOH (1.5 mL). The product was eluted with 2.0 M NH3/MeOH (1.5 mL). The eluant was cone, and placed under vacuum. The residue was dissolved in 5% TFA in MeOH. The solution was cone, and placed under vacuum. Et2O was added to precipitate a solid. The solid was collected by filtration. 7.3 mg (54% - 2 steps) of Example 229 was obtained in the TFA salt form. MS (M+H)+ = 541.
EXAMPLES 230-231
Figure imgf000157_0001
Compounds having the formula (Ip) above wherein the groups R30 and R31 are as set forth in Table 14 were prepared using the method of Example 229 with the following modification. Examples 230 and 231 were prepared by substituting N- benzylmethylamine and N-benzylethylamine, respectively, in place of N,N- dimethylamine in Step A and heating the reaction at 90°C for 24 h. The products from Step A were treated with cone. H2SO for 4 h. The reactions were quenched with water, partially neutralized with 5N NaOH, diluted with MeOH, filtered and purified by PREP HPLC, to give the Examples in Table 14.
TABLE 14
Figure imgf000157_0002
EXAMPLE 232
Step A;
Figure imgf000158_0002
To a suspension of NaH (258 mg, 10.2 mmol) in DMF (15 ml) was added a
solution of
Figure imgf000158_0003
(2.0 g, 8.5 mmol) in DMF (5.0 ml) at room temperature. The resulting mixture was stirred at rt for 30 min. TfzNPh (3.50 g, 9.8 mmol) was added in one portion, and the mixture was stirred at rt overnight. The mixture was diluted with ether (10 ml), washed with saturated ammonium chloride solution (3x30 ml), water (2x30 ml), brine (30 ml), dried (MgSO4) and evaporated to give the crude product. Purification of the crude product by column chromatography (silica, 5-15% CH2Cl2/hexane) gave compound 232A (1.30 g) as a colorless oil. Step B:
Figure imgf000159_0001
bis(pinacolate)diboron (862 mg, 3.40 mmol), potassium acetate (750 mg), PdCl2(dppf) and 4A molecule sieves (ground, 4.0 g) in dioxane (25 ml) was heated at 107 °C overnight. The mixture was cooled to rt and diluted with ether. The solid was removed by filtration and the filtrate was washed with water, brine, dried (MgSO ) and concentrated to give the crude product as a dark brown oil. Purification by column chromatography (silica, 10-20% EtOAc/hexane) gave 232B (1.02 g) as a colorless oil. MS: (M+H)+=452.
Step C:
Figure imgf000159_0002
To a solution of compound 232B (530 mg, 1.17 mmol) in acetic acid (2.0 ml) was added water (3.0 ml). The mixture was stirred at rt overnight. The white precipitate was collected by filtration, washed with water and dried to give the compound 232C (295 mg) as a white solid.
Step D:
Figure imgf000160_0001
To a solution of compound 232A (37 mg, 0J0 mmol) in dioxane (3 mL) was added potassium phosphate (106 mg, 0.5 mmol), boronic acid 232C (41 mg, 0.H mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (6 mg, 0.01 mmol). The mixture was stirred at rt overnight under argon. The mixture was diluted with DCM, filtered through a layer of celite and concentrated to give the crude product. Purification by flash column chromatography (silica, 10-30% CH2Cl2/hexane) gave compound 232D (40 mg) as a light yellow oil. MS: (M+H)+=542.
Step E:
Figure imgf000160_0002
To a solution of ester 232D (40 mg, 0.74 mmol) in CH2C12 (1.6 mL) was added TFA (0.4 ml). The mixture was stirred at rt for 1 h. The solvent and excess TFA was removed under vacuum to give compound 232E (32 mg) as a yellow film.
Step F:
Figure imgf000161_0001
added
Figure imgf000161_0002
mmol), HOAt (1 mg), and DMAP (1 mg). The mixture was stirred at rt overnight, filtered, evaporated to give the crade product. Purification by flash column chromatography (silica, 0-5% MeOH/DCM) gave 232F (26 mg) as a yellow film. MS: (M+H)+=750.
Step G; Example 232
A mixture of compound 232F (16 mg, 0.021 mmol), Pd/C (10%, 10 mg) in MeOH (2 mL) was stirred under hydrogen atmosphere (hydrogen balloon) at rt for 2 days. HPLC indicated completion of the reaction. The reaction mixture was filtered through a celite cake and lyophilized to give Example 232 (5.6 mg) as a white fluffy powder. MS: (M+H)+=527.

Claims

CLAIMSWe claim:
1. A compound having the formula (I) :
Figure imgf000162_0001
or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof, wherein: W is selected from C2-ι0alkyl, C2-ιoalkenyl, substituted C2-ιoalkyl, substituted C2_ loalkenyl, -C(=O)NR4R5, -OR6, -CO2R4, -C(=O)R4, -SR4 ,-S(O)pR4, -NR4R5, -NR4SO2R5, -NR4aSO2NR4R5> -NR4CO2R5, -NR4C(=O)R5, -NR4aC(=O)NR4R5,
-SO2NR4.R5, heterocyclo, heteroaryl, aryl, and cycloalkyl; ring B is phenyl or pyridyl;
X2 is N, CH, or C, provided that X2 is C when Ri and R2 join to form a fully unsaturated ring;
L is -(CRi8Ri9)s-Y-(CRi8aRi9a)t;
Y is selected from -C(=O), -C(=O)NR13- -NR13C(=O)-, -NR13CR14Rι5-
-CR14R15-NR13-, and -CRι3Rι4-CR15Rι6-; Z is a 5 to 7-membered monocyclic or 8 to 11-membered bicyclic aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, or cycloalkyl, wherein each Z group is optionally substituted with up to two R20 and/or up to one R21, except Z is not phenyl substituted with phenyloxy when W is methoxy, s is 0 and Y is -CH2-CH2-; Ri and R2 (i) are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, heteroaryl, aryl, heterocyclo, and cycloalkyl; or (ii) are taken together to form an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclo, provided that Ri and R do not together form pyrazole when W is methoxy and Z is biphenyl; and when Ri and R2 individually or together form a heteroaryl, aryl, heterocyclo, or cycloalkyl, said cyclic group is optionally substituted with up to three R26; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, heteroaryl, aryl, heterocyclo, cycloalkyl, or alkyl substituted with -OC(=O)R2 or -OC(=O)OR24, wherein R2 is alkyl, substituted alkyl, or cycloalkyl, provided that R3 is not phenyl when W is methoxy; Rt, Rta, R5 and R6 are (i) independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, and cycloalkyl; or alternatively, (ii) Rt and R5 may be taken together to form a five-to-seven membered heteroaryl or heterocyclo, except when W is -S(O)pR , then R4 is not hydrogen; R8 and R26 (i) are at each occurrence independently selected from hydrogen, OR30, NR3ιR32, NR31SO2R32a, alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, alkylthio, -C(=O)H, acyl, -CO2H, alkoxycarbonyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, and phenyl, or (ii) two of R8 and/or two of R 6 may be taken together to form a fused benzo ring, a fused heteroaryl, a fused cycloalkyl, or a fused heterocyclo other than a five or six membered heterocyclo having as its heteroatoms two oxygen atoms, provided further that when two R26 form a fused benzo ring, then Z is not phenyl substituted in the para position with cyano or a five-membered heterocycle or heteroaryl; Rι3, R14, R15, R16, Ri8, Risa, R19, and Rι aare selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, hydroxy, and lower alkyl substituted with hydroxy or halogen;
R o and R2i are independently selected at each occurrence from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, -C(=O)NR22R 3, -OR22, -CO2R22, -C(=O)R22, -SR22, -S(O)qR22a, -NR22R23,-NR22SO2R23, - NR22CO2R23, -NR22C(=O)R23, -NR22C(=O)NR23R33,-SO2NR22R23, - NR22SO2NR23R33, five or six membered heterocyclo or heteroaryl, phenyl, and four to seven membered cycloalkyl, wherein when R20 and/or R21 independent of each other comprise a cyclic group, each cyclic group in turn is optionally substituted with up to tliree of Cι-4alkyl, Cι- alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, amino, alkylamino, and/or cyano; R22, R23 and R33 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, and substituted alkyl; R22ais alkyl or substituted alkyl; R3o at each occurrence is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkyl, and phenyl; R31 and R32 at each occurrence are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, and cycloalkyl; R 2ais alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; m is 0, 1 or 2 when ring B is phenyl and 0 or 1 when ring B is pyridyl; p and q are independently 1 or 2; and s and t are independently 0, 1 or 2.
2. A compound according to claim 1, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof, wherein: ring B is phenyl;
W is selected from -C(=O)NR-ιR5, -OR6, optionally-substituted heterocycle, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, and Cι- alkyl substituted with alkoxy;
L is -(CH2)S-Y-;
Y is selected from -C(=O), -NHC(=O)-, -NH-CH2- and -CH2-CH2-; Z is selected from
Figure imgf000164_0001
Figure imgf000165_0001
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, or alkyl substituted with -OC(=O)R24 or-OC(=O)O-R24; R4 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
R5 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, heterocyclo or heteroaryl;
R6 is C2-4alkyl, phenyl or benzyl;
R26 is selected from hydrogen, OR30, NR3ιR32, alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, alkylthio,
-C(=O)H, acyl, -CO2H, alkoxycarbonyl, or phenyl, or (ii) two of R26 may be taken together to form a fused benzo ring when Z is not phenyl substituted in the para position with a five-membered heterocycle or heteroaryl;
R2o and R21 are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, nitro, -OR22, -NR22R23, five or six membered heterocyclo or heteroaryl, phenyl, and four to seven membered cycloalkyl, or alkyl substituted with amino or alkylamino, wherein when R2o and/or R2ι comprise a cyclic group, each cyclic group in turn is optionally substituted with up to three of Cι-4alkyl, Cι- alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, amino, alkylamino, and/or cyano; n is 0, 1 or 2; and s is 0 or 1.
3. A compound according to claim 1, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof, wherein Z is selected from:
Figure imgf000166_0001
Figure imgf000166_0002
wherein n is 0, 1 or 2, and R2oa is selected from the group of R20 except R20a is not halogen or CO2H.
4. A compound according to claim 1, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrag thereof, in which t is 0 and either:
(a) s is 0 and Z is selected from:
Figure imgf000166_0003
Figure imgf000167_0001
(b) s is 1 and Z is selected from:
Figure imgf000167_0002
5. A compound according to claim 1, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt,
hydrate or prodrug thereof, in which s and t are 0 and Z is
Figure imgf000167_0003
6. A compound according to claim 5, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrag thereof, in which Y is -NHC(=O)-.
7. A compound according to claim 1, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrag thereof, in which W is -C(=O)NR4R5.
8. A compound according to claim 7, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof, in which W is -C(=O)NH-CH(R25)-C(CH3)3 and R25 is hydrogen, Cι- alkyl, or C^hydroxyalkyl.
9. A compound according to claim 1, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof, in which one of \ and R2 is selected from hydrogen and lower alkyl, the other of \ and R is aryl or arylalkyl, and W is not aryl or alkylaryl.
10. A compound according to claim 1, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof, having the formula:
Figure imgf000168_0001
in which:
Xi is selected (i) from -CR9R10-, -C(=O)-, -NR9a-, -O- and -S- when the bond between Xi and the adjacent carbon atom to which R27 is attached (or when r is 0, the carbon atom to which R26 is attached) is a single bond, and (ii) from -CR - and -N- when said bond is a double bond; X3 is selected (i) from CH2 and NH when the bond between X3 and the adjacent carbon atom to which R26 is attached is a single bond, and (ii) from -CH- and -N- when said bond is a double bond; R9 and R10 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, alkylamino, alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, alkylthio, -C(=O)H, acyl, -CO H, and alkoxycarbonyl; R9a is selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkyl, and substituted alkenyl;
R26 and R27 are selected from hydrogen, OR3o, NR3ιR32, alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, alkylthio, -C(=O)H, acyl, -CO2H, alkoxycarbonyl, and phenyl, or (ii) R26 and R27 may be taken together to form a fused benzo ring when Z is not phenyl substituted in the para position with cyano or a five-membered heterocycle or heteroaryl; and r is O or 1.
11. The compound of claim 1 , or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof, in which W is -C(=O)NHCH(R25)-t-butyl; L is -NHC(=O)-;
R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, or lower alkyl substituted with -OC(=O) (alkyl), - OC(=O)O-(alkyl), -OC(=O) (cycloalkyl), or -OC(=O)O(cycloalkyl); and R25 is hydrogen or hydroxymethyl.
12. A compound according to claim 1, having a formula selected from (i)
Figure imgf000169_0001
Figure imgf000169_0002
Figure imgf000170_0001
in which R25 is hydrogen or hydroxymethyl, and R30 and R3ι are lower alkyl, or (ii) a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof.
13. A compound having a formula (LA) or (IIA):
Figure imgf000170_0002
or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof, wherein: W is selected from C^oalkyl, C^toalkenyl, substituted C2-ιoalkyl, substituted C2- loalkenyl, -C(=O)NR4R5, -OR6, -CO2R4, -C(=O)R4, -SR4, -S(O)pR4, -NR4R5, -NR4SO2R5, -NR4CO2R5, -NR4C(=O)R5, -SO2NR4R5, -NR4aSO2NR4R5,, -NR aC(=O)NR4R5>, heterocyclo, heteroaryl, aryl, and cycloalkyl; Xi is selected (i) from -CR9R10-, -C(=O)-, -NR9a-, — O- and -S- when the bond between Xi and the adjacent carbon atom to which R27 is attached (or when r is 0,
469- the carbon atom to which R26 is attached) is a single bond, and (ii) from -CR9- and -N- when said bond is a double bond; X3 is selected (i) from -CRπR12- -C(=O)-, -NRna- -O- and -S- when the bond between X3 and the carbon atom to which R26 is attached is a single bond, and (ii) from — CRn— and -N- when said bond is a double bond;
Y is selected from -C(=O)NR13- -NR13C(=O)-, -NRι3CR14Rι5- -CR14Rι5-NR13-
and -CR13R14-CRι5Rι6-, or Y may be -C(=O)-, when Z is
Figure imgf000171_0001
Z is selected from a 5 to 7-membered monocyclic or 8 to 11-membered bicyclic aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, or cycloalkyl, wherein each Z group is optionally substituted with up to two R20 and/or up to one R2ι ;
Ri and R2 (i) are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, heteroaryl, aryl, heterocyclo, and cycloalkyl; or (ii) are taken together to form a five-to-seven membered heterocyclo; wherein when Ri and R2 individually or together form a cyclic group, said cyclic group is optionally substituted with up to two R26;
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, heteroaryl, aryl, heterocyclo, cycloalkyl, or alkyl substituted with one of-OC(=O)R 4 and -OC(=O)O-R24, wherein R24JS alkyl, substituted alkyl, or cycloalkyl;
Rt, Rta and R5 are (i) independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, and cycloalkyl; or alternatively (ii) R4 and R5 may be taken together to form a five-to-seven membered heteroaryl or heterocyclo ring, except when W is -S(O)pR4, then R4 is not hydrogen;
R6 is C2-6alkyl, phenyl, or benzyl; R8, R9, Rio, R11, R12, R26 and R27 (i) are at each occurrence independently selected from hydrogen, OR30, NR31R32, NR31SO2R32a, alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, halogen, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, alkylthio, -C(=O)H, acyl, -CO2H, alkoxycarbonyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, and phenyl, or (ii) when r is 1, R26 and R2 may be taken together to form a fused benzo ring, provided that when R26 and R2 form a fused benzo ring then Z is not phenyl substituted in the para position with cyano or a five-membered heterocycle or heteroaryl; R a and Rna are selected from hydrogen, OR3o, NR ιR32, alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, -C(=O)H, acyl, alkoxycarbonyl, sulfonamido, sulfonyl, and phenyl, R13, R14, R15, and Rι6 are selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, hydroxy, or lower alkyl substituted with hydroxy or halogen; R2o and R21 are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, cyano, nitro, -C(=O)NR22R23, -OR 2, -CO2R22,
-C(=O)R22, -SR22, -S(O)qR22a,-NR22R23, -NR22SO2R23, -NR22CO2R23, - NR22C(=O)R23, -SO2NR22R23, -NR22C(=O)NR 3R33, - NR22SO2NR23R33, five or six membered heterocyclo or heteroaryl, phenyl, and four to seven membered cycloalkyl, wherein when R2o and/or R21 comprise a cyclic group, each cyclic group is in turn optionally substituted with up to three lower alkyl, halogen, hydroxy, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, amino, aminoalkyl, or cyano; R22, R23, and R33 are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, and substituted alkyl; R3o at each occurrence is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkyl, and phenyl;
R31 and R32 at each occurrence are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, and cycloalkyl; R22a and R32a at each occurrence are independently selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, and cycloalkyl; m is 0, 1 or 2; p and q are independently 1 or 2; r is O or 1; and -? is O or 1.
14. A compound according to claim 13 having the formula (LA), in which X is N, CH, or CH2, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrag thereof.
15. A compound according to claim 13 having the formula:
Figure imgf000173_0001
or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof.
16. A compound according to claim 15 or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrag thereof in which
(a) 5 is 0 and Z is selected from:
Figure imgf000173_0002
(b) s ϊs l and Z is selected from:
Figure imgf000174_0001
R26 is C2-6straight or branched alkenyl, -OR3o or -NR3ιR32;
R o is C1-5 straight or branched chain alkyl, C2-6straight or branched alkenyl, C3- scycloalkyl, or Cι- straight or branched chain alkyl substituted with one to two of halogen, lower alkoxy, and C3-5cycloalkyl; and
R3ι and R32 are selected from hydrogen and lower alkyl.
17. A compound according to claim 13, in which the groups Z-(CH2)S-Y- taken together are selected from:
Figure imgf000174_0002
18. A compound having the formula (IA) or (LIA):
Figure imgf000175_0001
or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrag thereof, wherein:
W is selected from -C(=O)NR4R5, -OR6, optionally-substituted heterocycle, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, and Cι- alkyl substituted with alkoxy; Xi is selected (i) from — CH2— , — NH— , — O- and -S- when the bond between \ and the carbon atom to which R27 is attached (or when r is 0, the bond between Xi and the carbon atom to which R26 is attached) is a single bond; and (ii) from
-CH- and -N- when said bond is a double bond; X3 is selected (i) from -CH2- -NH-, -O- and -S- when the bond between X3 and the carbon atom to which R26 is attached is a single bond, and (ii) from — CH— and
-N— when said bond is a double bond; Y is selected from -NHC(=O)-, -NH-CH2- and -CH2-CH2- or Y may be -C(=O)-
Figure imgf000175_0002
Z is selected from:
Figure imgf000175_0003
Figure imgf000176_0001
Figure imgf000176_0002
Ri and R2 (i) are independently selected from hydrogen, -Cι-4alkyl, phenyl, and -C\. 4alkyl substituted with phenyl; or (ii) are taken together to form a five-to-seven membered heterocyclo; R3 is hydrogen or C1- alkyl; a) R4 is selected from hydrogen, d-4-dkyl, and CMalkyl substituted with hydroxy; and R5 is selected from: i) Cι_ι0alkyl or Ci-ioalkenyl; ii) Ci-6-ιlkyl or -ϊoalkenyl substituted with one to tliree of: a. OH, keto (=O), -OCι-4alkyl; b. partially or fully saturated cycloalkyl in turn optionally substituted with Cι- alkyl or hydroxy; c. phenyl in turn optionally substituted with halogen, hydroxy, methoxy, Cι-4alkyl, -SO2NH2, or -NO2; d. heteroaryl in turn optionally substituted with methyl; e. heterocyclo; and/or f. NHPhenyl; iii) heteroaryl or heterocyclo optionally substituted with NH ; b) or alternatively, P^ and R5 together form a heterocyclo or heteroaryl optionally substituted with hydroxy, Cι-4alkyl, and Cι- alkyl substituted with one or more of hydroxy and/or phenyl; R6 is selected from C2- alkyl, phenyl and benzyl;
R26 and R27 at each occurrence are independently selected of each other from the group consisting of hydrogen, Cι-4alkyl, C2-4alkenyl, OR3o, NR3ιR32, phenyloxy, and benzyloxy, or when r is 1, R26 and R27 may be taken together to form a fused benzo ring, provided that when R26 and R2 form a fused benzo ring then Z is not phenyl substituted in the para position with a five-membered heterocycle or heteroaryl; R2o and R21 are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, -C(=O)NH2,
-C(=O)Cι-4alkyl, -NH2, -NHC1.4alkyl, -S-Cj-4alkyl, -O-Cι-4alkyl, d-4alkyl, Q- alkyl substituted with NH2, and five or six membered heterocyclo or heteroaryl; R3o at each occurrence is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkyl, and phenyl; R3ι and R3 at each occurrence are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, and cycloalkyl; n is 0, 1 or 2; r is 0 or 1 ; and s is O or 1.
19. A compound according to claim 18, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrag thereof, in which Z is: a) a 6,5 bicyclic heteroaryl selected from:
Figure imgf000178_0001
Figure imgf000178_0002
Figure imgf000178_0003
Figure imgf000178_0004
Figure imgf000178_0005
b) the 5,6 bicyclic heteroaryl group
Figure imgf000179_0001
c) a 6,6 bicyclic heteroaryl or aryl group selected from:
Figure imgf000179_0002
Figure imgf000179_0003
Figure imgf000179_0004
Figure imgf000179_0005
d) a phenyl group selected from:
Figure imgf000180_0001
e) a monocyclic heteroaryl group selected from:
Figure imgf000180_0002
f) a heterocyclo group selected from:
Figure imgf000181_0001
or g) a cycloalkyl group selected from:
Figure imgf000181_0002
20. A compound according to claim 18 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrag thereof, having the formula:
Figure imgf000181_0003
in which R25 is hydrogen or hydroxymethyl, and R26 is NR3ιR32.
21. A pharmaceutical composition comprising (a) at least one compound according to claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrag thereof, and (b) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
22. A pharmaceutical composition comprising (a) at least one compound according to claim 13, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof, and (b) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
23. A pharmaceutical composition for treating an inflammatory or immune disorder comprising (a) at least one compound according to claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrag thereof, (b) at least one second compound for treating an an inflammatory or immune disorder and (b) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
24. A pharmaceutical composition for treating a coagulation-associated disorder comprising (i) at least one compound of claim 1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof; (ii) one or more second compounds effective for treating a coagulation-associated disorder; and (iii) a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier.
25. A method of treating a coagulation-associated disorder, an inflammatory or immune disease, or metastases comprising administering to a mammal in need thereof a therapeutically-effective amount of at least one compound according to claim 1.
26 A method for maintaining a blood supply in the fluid phase comprising administering to said blood supply at least one compound according to claim 1.
PCT/US2001/046884 2000-11-07 2001-11-07 Acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors WO2002042273A2 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2002227269A AU2002227269A1 (en) 2000-11-07 2001-11-07 Acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors
JP2002544409A JP2004514669A (en) 2000-11-07 2001-11-07 Acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors
HU0400651A HUP0400651A2 (en) 2000-11-07 2001-11-07 Acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
CA002428191A CA2428191A1 (en) 2000-11-07 2001-11-07 Acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors
EP01996145A EP1332131A2 (en) 2000-11-07 2001-11-07 Acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US24639200P 2000-11-07 2000-11-07
US60/246,392 2000-11-07

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2002042273A2 true WO2002042273A2 (en) 2002-05-30
WO2002042273A3 WO2002042273A3 (en) 2002-08-29

Family

ID=22930465

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2001/046884 WO2002042273A2 (en) 2000-11-07 2001-11-07 Acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (1) US6642252B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1332131A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2004514669A (en)
AU (1) AU2002227269A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2428191A1 (en)
HU (1) HUP0400651A2 (en)
WO (1) WO2002042273A2 (en)

Cited By (56)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1394147A1 (en) * 2001-06-04 2004-03-03 Eisai Co., Ltd. Carboxylic acid derivative and medicine comprising salt or ester of the same
US6730684B1 (en) 1999-10-08 2004-05-04 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
US6762201B1 (en) 1999-10-08 2004-07-13 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
US6765005B2 (en) 1999-04-19 2004-07-20 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
WO2004096784A1 (en) * 2003-04-28 2004-11-11 Astrazeneca Ab New heterocyclic amides exhibiting an inhibitory activity at the vanilloid receptor 1 (vr1).
WO2004101535A1 (en) * 2003-05-16 2004-11-25 Novartis Ag Pharmaceutical composition comprising valsartan
US6846819B1 (en) 1999-10-08 2005-01-25 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
WO2005016928A1 (en) * 2003-08-15 2005-02-24 Banyu Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Imidazopyridine derivatives
US6906192B2 (en) 2000-11-07 2005-06-14 Bristol Myers Squibb Company Processes for the preparation of acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors
US6964970B2 (en) 1999-06-01 2005-11-15 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antibacterial compounds
EP1594845A2 (en) * 2003-02-11 2005-11-16 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Benzene acetamide compounds useful as serine protease inhibitors
WO2005108399A1 (en) * 2004-05-10 2005-11-17 Banyu Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Imidazopyridine compound
WO2005123680A1 (en) 2004-06-15 2005-12-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Six-membered heterocycles useful as serine protease inhibitors
US7049310B2 (en) 2001-04-06 2006-05-23 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
WO2006066173A2 (en) * 2004-12-17 2006-06-22 Eli Lilly And Company Novel mch receptor antagonists
US7071216B2 (en) 2002-03-29 2006-07-04 Chiron Corporation Substituted benz-azoles and methods of their use as inhibitors of Raf kinase
US7138412B2 (en) 2003-03-11 2006-11-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Tetrahydroquinoline derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors
WO2007070818A1 (en) * 2005-12-14 2007-06-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Six-membered heterocycles useful as serine protease inhibitors
WO2008031508A1 (en) 2006-09-13 2008-03-20 Sanofi-Aventis TARTRATE DERIVATIVES FOR USE AS COAGULATION FACTOR IXa INHIBITORS
US7423150B2 (en) 2003-10-16 2008-09-09 Novartis Ag Substituted benzazoles and methods of their use as inhibitors of Raf kinase
US7511035B2 (en) 2005-01-25 2009-03-31 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial agents
US7544835B2 (en) 2001-04-20 2009-06-09 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Carboxylic acid derivative and salt thereof
US7652041B2 (en) 2005-01-14 2010-01-26 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cinnamide and hydrocinnamide derivatives with kinase inhibitory activity
US7781595B2 (en) 2003-09-22 2010-08-24 S*Bio Pte Ltd. Benzimidazole derivatives: preparation and pharmaceutical applications
US7893096B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2011-02-22 Novartis Vaccines And Diagnostics, Inc. Use of small molecule compounds for immunopotentiation
US8097758B2 (en) 2006-09-13 2012-01-17 Sanofi-Aventis Isoserine derivatives for use as coagulation factor IXa inhibitors
US8299108B2 (en) 2002-03-29 2012-10-30 Novartis Ag Substituted benzazoles and methods of their use as inhibitors of raf kinase
US8604055B2 (en) 2004-12-31 2013-12-10 Dr. Reddy's Laboratories Ltd. Substituted benzylamino quinolines as cholesterol ester-transfer protein inhibitors
US8895545B2 (en) 2006-07-20 2014-11-25 Debiopharm International Sa Acrylamide derivatives as Fab I inhibitors
US8901105B2 (en) 2012-06-19 2014-12-02 Debiopharm International Sa Prodrug derivatives of (E)-N-methyl-N-((3-M ethylbenzofuran-2-yl)methyl)-3-(7-oxo-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-1,8-naphthyridin-3-yl)acrylamide
WO2015063093A1 (en) * 2013-10-30 2015-05-07 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
US9040558B2 (en) 2004-12-31 2015-05-26 Dr. Reddy's Laboratories Ltd. Substituted benzylamino quinolines as cholesterol ester-transfer protein inhibitors
WO2015123091A1 (en) 2014-02-11 2015-08-20 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Factor xia inhibitors
WO2015123093A1 (en) 2014-02-11 2015-08-20 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Factor xia inhibitors
WO2015164308A1 (en) 2014-04-22 2015-10-29 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. FACTOR XIa INHIBITORS
US9242969B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-01-26 Novartis Ag Biaryl amide compounds as kinase inhibitors
WO2016015593A1 (en) 2014-07-28 2016-02-04 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. FACTOR XIa INHIBITORS
WO2016046158A1 (en) * 2014-09-24 2016-03-31 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
WO2016046156A1 (en) * 2014-09-24 2016-03-31 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
WO2016029216A3 (en) * 2014-08-22 2016-05-12 Biocryst Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method for producing amidine derivatives
EP2914580A4 (en) * 2012-11-05 2016-06-01 Lg Life Sciences Ltd Thioaryl derivatives as gpr120 agonists
US9573969B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2017-02-21 Novartis Ag Compounds and compositions as kinase inhibitors
WO2017074832A1 (en) 2015-10-29 2017-05-04 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. FACTOR XIa INHIBITORS
WO2017074833A1 (en) 2015-10-29 2017-05-04 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Macrocyclic spirocarbamate derivatives as factor xia inhibitors, pharmaceutically acceptable compositions and their use
US9862737B2 (en) 2007-02-16 2018-01-09 Debiopharm International Sa Salts, prodrugs and polymorphs of fab I inhibitors
WO2018039094A1 (en) 2016-08-22 2018-03-01 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Pyridine-1-oxide derivatives and their use as factor xia inhibitors
US10112915B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2018-10-30 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-aryl bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10183934B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-01-22 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. Bicyclic [4,6,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
CN109879808A (en) * 2019-03-05 2019-06-14 北京工业大学 One kind chalcones derivative of base containing five-membered azole heterocycle and preparation method and medical usage
US10421742B2 (en) 2015-07-09 2019-09-24 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
US10555935B2 (en) 2016-06-17 2020-02-11 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 2-spiro-5- and 6-hydroxamic acid indanes as HDAC inhibitors
US10626092B2 (en) 2016-05-02 2020-04-21 Mei Pharma, Inc. Polymorphic forms of 3-[(2-butyl-1-(2-diethylamino-ethyl)-1H-benzoimidazol-5-yl]-N-hydroxy-acrylamide and uses thereof
US10647661B2 (en) 2017-07-11 2020-05-12 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Carboxamides as modulators of sodium channels
US10751351B2 (en) 2016-02-26 2020-08-25 Debiopharm International S.A. Medicament for treatment of diabetic foot infections
US12011449B2 (en) 2016-09-19 2024-06-18 Novartis Ag Therapeutic combinations comprising a c-RAF inhibitor
US12036227B2 (en) 2017-05-02 2024-07-16 Novartis Ag Combination therapy

Families Citing this family (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1350511B1 (en) * 2000-12-25 2008-09-10 Daiichi Sankyo Company, Limited Medicinal compositions containing aspirin
KR20100028674A (en) * 2001-06-29 2010-03-12 가부시키가이샤 시세이도 Composite powders and skin preparations for external use containing the same
EP1594505A4 (en) * 2003-02-11 2008-08-13 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Phenylglycine derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors
AU2004249671A1 (en) * 2003-05-20 2004-12-29 Genentech, Inc. Benzofuran inhibitors of factor VIIa
JP2007505160A (en) * 2003-05-20 2007-03-08 ジェネンテック・インコーポレーテッド Acylsulfamide inhibitors of factor VIIa
DE10323898A1 (en) * 2003-05-26 2004-12-23 Wilex Ag Hydroxyamidine and hydroxyguanidine compounds as urokinase inhibitors
ATE405553T1 (en) * 2004-12-08 2008-09-15 Bristol Myers Squibb Co HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS AS INHIBITORS OF FACTOR VIIA
PE20061117A1 (en) * 2005-01-10 2006-10-13 Bristol Myers Squibb Co DERIVATIVES OF PHENYLGLYCINAMIDE AS INHIBITORS OF FACTOR VIIa
EP2987796B1 (en) 2005-02-16 2018-08-08 Anacor Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Halogen-substituted boronophthalides for the treatment of infections
US7767657B2 (en) * 2005-02-16 2010-08-03 Anacor Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Boron-containing small molecules
ATE455103T1 (en) * 2005-06-24 2010-01-15 Bristol Myers Squibb Co PHENYLGLYCINAMIDE AND PYRIDYLGLYCINAMIDE DERIVATIVES USED AS ANTICOAGULATION AGENTS
PE20071132A1 (en) * 2005-12-23 2007-12-14 Bristol Myers Squibb Co MACROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS AS INHIBITORS OF FACTOR VIIA
EP2061756B1 (en) 2006-06-08 2013-09-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company 2-aminocarbonylphenylamino-2-phenilacetamides as factor viia inhibitors useful as anticoagulants
PE20081775A1 (en) * 2006-12-20 2008-12-18 Bristol Myers Squibb Co MACROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS AS INHIBITORS OF FACTOR VIIA
EP2099783A1 (en) * 2006-12-20 2009-09-16 Brystol-Myers Squibb Company Bicyclic lactam factor viia inhibitors useful as anticoagulants
JP5964965B2 (en) 2011-08-18 2016-08-03 ドクター レディズ ラボラトリーズ リミテッド Substituted heterocyclic amine compounds as cholesteryl ester transfer protein (CETP) inhibitors
MX352074B (en) 2011-09-27 2017-11-08 Dr Reddys Laboratories Ltd 5 - benzylaminomethyl - 6 - aminopyrazolo [3, 4 -b] pyridine derivatives as cholesteryl ester -transfer protein (cetp) inhibitors useful for the treatment of atherosclerosis.
WO2018002673A1 (en) 2016-07-01 2018-01-04 N4 Pharma Uk Limited Novel formulations of angiotensin ii receptor antagonists

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3995045A (en) * 1975-09-25 1976-11-30 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. 2'-[(3,6-Dihydro-phenyl-1(2H)pyridinyl)alkylaminocarbonyl][1,1'-biphenyl]-2-carboxylic acids
GB2056968A (en) * 1979-08-21 1981-03-25 Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co Piperazine derivative, processes for the preparation thereof and pharmaceutical composition comprising the same
WO1998057937A2 (en) * 1997-06-19 1998-12-23 The Du Pont Merck Pharmaceutical Company Inhibitors of factor xa with a neutral p1 specificity group
WO1999041231A1 (en) * 1998-02-17 1999-08-19 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Amidino derivatives and drugs containing the same as the active ingredient
WO2001070678A2 (en) * 2000-03-24 2001-09-27 Merck Patent Gmbh Substituted biphenyl derivatives
WO2002034711A1 (en) * 2000-10-20 2002-05-02 Biocryst Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Biaryl compounds as serine protease inhibitors

Family Cites Families (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5137818B2 (en) 1972-09-01 1976-10-18
US4786755A (en) 1985-06-03 1988-11-22 Warner-Lambert Company Diphenic acid monoamides
JPH0623151B2 (en) 1989-06-02 1994-03-30 田辺製薬株式会社 Biphenyl derivative, production method thereof and synthetic intermediate thereof
US5612341A (en) 1995-06-07 1997-03-18 Biotech Research Laboratories Brominated hexahydroxybiphenyl derivatives
AU712082B2 (en) 1996-02-28 1999-10-28 Merck & Co., Inc. Fibrinogen receptor antagonists
IL123986A (en) 1997-04-24 2011-10-31 Organon Nv Serine protease inhibiting antithrombotic agents and pharmaceutical compositions comprising them
US5783705A (en) 1997-04-28 1998-07-21 Texas Biotechnology Corporation Process of preparing alkali metal salys of hydrophobic sulfonamides
US6358959B1 (en) 1999-01-26 2002-03-19 Merck & Co., Inc. Polyazanaphthalenone derivatives useful as alpha 1a adrenoceptor antagonists
ATE259363T1 (en) 1999-09-25 2004-02-15 Smithkline Beecham Plc PIPERAZINE DERIVATIVES AS 5-HT1B ANTAGONISTS
EP1242366A1 (en) 1999-12-15 2002-09-25 Axys Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Salicylamides as serine protease and factor xa inhibitors
NZ523553A (en) 2000-07-12 2004-04-30 Akzo Nobel Nv Thrombin inhibitors comprising an aminoisoquinoline group
DE10046272A1 (en) 2000-09-19 2002-03-28 Merck Patent Gmbh New biphenyl-substituted amino-(iso)quinoline derivatives, are factor Xa and factor VIIa inhibitors useful e.g. for treating thrombosis, myocardial infarction, inflammation, angina pectoris or restenosis

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3995045A (en) * 1975-09-25 1976-11-30 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. 2'-[(3,6-Dihydro-phenyl-1(2H)pyridinyl)alkylaminocarbonyl][1,1'-biphenyl]-2-carboxylic acids
GB2056968A (en) * 1979-08-21 1981-03-25 Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co Piperazine derivative, processes for the preparation thereof and pharmaceutical composition comprising the same
WO1998057937A2 (en) * 1997-06-19 1998-12-23 The Du Pont Merck Pharmaceutical Company Inhibitors of factor xa with a neutral p1 specificity group
WO1999041231A1 (en) * 1998-02-17 1999-08-19 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Amidino derivatives and drugs containing the same as the active ingredient
WO2001070678A2 (en) * 2000-03-24 2001-09-27 Merck Patent Gmbh Substituted biphenyl derivatives
WO2002034711A1 (en) * 2000-10-20 2002-05-02 Biocryst Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Biaryl compounds as serine protease inhibitors

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
G.KESERU ET AL: "Synthesis of Plagiochins C and D" TETRAHEDRON, vol. 48, no. 5, 1992, pages 913-922, XP001080011 *
KOHRT J T ET AL: "An efficient synthesis of 2-(3-(4-amidinophenylcarbamoyl)naphthalen- 2 -yl)-5-((2,2-methylpropyl)carbamo yl)benzoic acid: a factor VIIa inhibitor discovered by the Ono Pharmaceutical Company" TETRAHEDRON LETTERS, ELSEVIER SCIENCE PUBLISHERS, AMSTERDAM, NL, vol. 41, no. 32, 5 August 2000 (2000-08-05), pages 6041-6044, XP004243509 ISSN: 0040-4039 *

Cited By (132)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6765005B2 (en) 1999-04-19 2004-07-20 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
US6964970B2 (en) 1999-06-01 2005-11-15 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antibacterial compounds
US6762201B1 (en) 1999-10-08 2004-07-13 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
US6730684B1 (en) 1999-10-08 2004-05-04 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
US6846819B1 (en) 1999-10-08 2005-01-25 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
US7557125B2 (en) 1999-10-08 2009-07-07 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
US7524843B2 (en) 1999-10-08 2009-04-28 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
US6906192B2 (en) 2000-11-07 2005-06-14 Bristol Myers Squibb Company Processes for the preparation of acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors
US7049310B2 (en) 2001-04-06 2006-05-23 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
US7250424B2 (en) 2001-04-06 2007-07-31 Affinium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fab I inhibitors
US7544835B2 (en) 2001-04-20 2009-06-09 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Carboxylic acid derivative and salt thereof
EP1394147A1 (en) * 2001-06-04 2004-03-03 Eisai Co., Ltd. Carboxylic acid derivative and medicine comprising salt or ester of the same
US7687664B2 (en) 2001-06-04 2010-03-30 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. Carboxylic acid derivative, a salt thereof or an ester of them, and medicament comprising it
EP1394147A4 (en) * 2001-06-04 2007-10-24 Eisai R&D Man Co Ltd Carboxylic acid derivative and medicine comprising salt or ester of the same
US7071216B2 (en) 2002-03-29 2006-07-04 Chiron Corporation Substituted benz-azoles and methods of their use as inhibitors of Raf kinase
US8614330B2 (en) 2002-03-29 2013-12-24 Novartis Vaccines And Diagnostics, Inc. Substituted benz-azoles and methods of their use as inhibitors of RAF kinase
US7728010B2 (en) 2002-03-29 2010-06-01 Novartis Vaccines And Diagnostics, Inc. Substituted benz-azoles and methods of their use as inhibitors of Raf kinase
US8299108B2 (en) 2002-03-29 2012-10-30 Novartis Ag Substituted benzazoles and methods of their use as inhibitors of raf kinase
EP1594845A4 (en) * 2003-02-11 2008-05-21 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Benzene acetamide compounds useful as serine protease inhibitors
JP2006517589A (en) * 2003-02-11 2006-07-27 ブリストル−マイヤーズ　スクイブ　カンパニー Benzeneacetamide compounds useful as serine protease inhibitors
EP1594845A2 (en) * 2003-02-11 2005-11-16 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Benzene acetamide compounds useful as serine protease inhibitors
US7138412B2 (en) 2003-03-11 2006-11-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Tetrahydroquinoline derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors
US7709646B2 (en) 2003-03-11 2010-05-04 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Tetrahydroquinoline derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors
US7893096B2 (en) 2003-03-28 2011-02-22 Novartis Vaccines And Diagnostics, Inc. Use of small molecule compounds for immunopotentiation
WO2004096784A1 (en) * 2003-04-28 2004-11-11 Astrazeneca Ab New heterocyclic amides exhibiting an inhibitory activity at the vanilloid receptor 1 (vr1).
WO2004101535A1 (en) * 2003-05-16 2004-11-25 Novartis Ag Pharmaceutical composition comprising valsartan
EP1657242A1 (en) * 2003-08-15 2006-05-17 Banyu Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Imidazopyridine derivatives
EP1657242A4 (en) * 2003-08-15 2008-10-29 Banyu Pharma Co Ltd Imidazopyridine derivatives
US7504412B2 (en) 2003-08-15 2009-03-17 Banyu Pharmaceuticals, Co., Ltd. Imidazopyridine derivatives
WO2005016928A1 (en) * 2003-08-15 2005-02-24 Banyu Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Imidazopyridine derivatives
US8551988B2 (en) 2003-09-22 2013-10-08 Mei Pharma, Inc. Benzimidazole derivatives: preparation and pharmaceutical applications
US9717713B2 (en) 2003-09-22 2017-08-01 Mei Pharma, Inc. Benzimidazole derivatives: preparation and pharmaceutical applications
US7781595B2 (en) 2003-09-22 2010-08-24 S*Bio Pte Ltd. Benzimidazole derivatives: preparation and pharmaceutical applications
US10736881B2 (en) 2003-09-22 2020-08-11 Mei Pharma, Inc. Benzimidazole derivatives: preparation and pharmaceutical applications
US9024029B2 (en) 2003-09-22 2015-05-05 Mei Pharma, Inc. Benzimidazole derivatives: preparation and pharmaceutical applications
US10201527B2 (en) 2003-09-22 2019-02-12 Mei Pharma, Inc. Benzimidazole derivatives: preparation and pharmaceutical applications
US9402829B2 (en) 2003-09-22 2016-08-02 Mei Pharma, Inc. Benzimidazole derivatives: preparation and pharmaceutical applications
US7423150B2 (en) 2003-10-16 2008-09-09 Novartis Ag Substituted benzazoles and methods of their use as inhibitors of Raf kinase
US8415382B2 (en) 2003-10-16 2013-04-09 Novartis Vaccines And Diagnostics, Inc. Substituted benzazoles and methods of their use as inhibitors of RAF Kinase
AU2005240942B2 (en) * 2004-05-10 2010-08-05 Banyu Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Imidazopyridine compound
US7566781B2 (en) 2004-05-10 2009-07-28 Banyu Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Imidazopyridine compound
WO2005108399A1 (en) * 2004-05-10 2005-11-17 Banyu Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Imidazopyridine compound
WO2005123680A1 (en) 2004-06-15 2005-12-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Six-membered heterocycles useful as serine protease inhibitors
JP4834663B2 (en) * 2004-06-15 2011-12-14 ブリストル−マイヤーズ スクイブ カンパニー 6-membered heterocycles useful as serine protease inhibitors
US7838543B2 (en) 2004-12-17 2010-11-23 Eli Lilly And Company MCH receptor antagonists
WO2006066173A3 (en) * 2004-12-17 2006-07-27 Lilly Co Eli Novel mch receptor antagonists
WO2006066173A2 (en) * 2004-12-17 2006-06-22 Eli Lilly And Company Novel mch receptor antagonists
US8604055B2 (en) 2004-12-31 2013-12-10 Dr. Reddy's Laboratories Ltd. Substituted benzylamino quinolines as cholesterol ester-transfer protein inhibitors
US9040558B2 (en) 2004-12-31 2015-05-26 Dr. Reddy's Laboratories Ltd. Substituted benzylamino quinolines as cholesterol ester-transfer protein inhibitors
US7652041B2 (en) 2005-01-14 2010-01-26 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Cinnamide and hydrocinnamide derivatives with kinase inhibitory activity
US7759340B2 (en) 2005-01-25 2010-07-20 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial agents
US7511035B2 (en) 2005-01-25 2009-03-31 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial agents
WO2007070818A1 (en) * 2005-12-14 2007-06-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Six-membered heterocycles useful as serine protease inhibitors
US8163749B2 (en) 2005-12-14 2012-04-24 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Six-membered heterocycles useful as serine protease inhibitors
US8895545B2 (en) 2006-07-20 2014-11-25 Debiopharm International Sa Acrylamide derivatives as Fab I inhibitors
US8263621B2 (en) 2006-09-13 2012-09-11 Sanofi Tartrate derivatives for use as coagulation factor IXa inhibitors
US8097758B2 (en) 2006-09-13 2012-01-17 Sanofi-Aventis Isoserine derivatives for use as coagulation factor IXa inhibitors
WO2008031508A1 (en) 2006-09-13 2008-03-20 Sanofi-Aventis TARTRATE DERIVATIVES FOR USE AS COAGULATION FACTOR IXa INHIBITORS
US9862737B2 (en) 2007-02-16 2018-01-09 Debiopharm International Sa Salts, prodrugs and polymorphs of fab I inhibitors
US8901105B2 (en) 2012-06-19 2014-12-02 Debiopharm International Sa Prodrug derivatives of (E)-N-methyl-N-((3-M ethylbenzofuran-2-yl)methyl)-3-(7-oxo-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-1,8-naphthyridin-3-yl)acrylamide
US10035813B2 (en) 2012-06-19 2018-07-31 Debiopharm International Sa Prodrug derivatives of (E)-N-methyl-N-((3-methylbenzofuran-2-yl)methyl)-3-(7-oxo-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-1,8-naphthyridin-3-yl)acrylamide
US9447044B2 (en) 2012-11-05 2016-09-20 Lg Life Sciences Ltd. Thioaryl derivatives as GPR120 agonists
TWI610917B (en) * 2012-11-05 2018-01-11 南韓商Ｌｇ化學股份有限公司 Thioaryl derivatives as gpr120 agonists
EP2914580A4 (en) * 2012-11-05 2016-06-01 Lg Life Sciences Ltd Thioaryl derivatives as gpr120 agonists
US10709712B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2020-07-14 Novartis Ag Biaryl amide compounds as kinase inhibitors
US9242969B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-01-26 Novartis Ag Biaryl amide compounds as kinase inhibitors
US9694016B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-07-04 Novartis Ag Biaryl amide compounds as kinase inhibitors
US10245267B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2019-04-02 Novartis Ag Biaryl amide compounds as kinase inhibitors
CN105849109A (en) * 2013-10-30 2016-08-10 拜耳制药股份公司 Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
WO2015063093A1 (en) * 2013-10-30 2015-05-07 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
US9765070B2 (en) 2013-10-30 2017-09-19 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
WO2015123093A1 (en) 2014-02-11 2015-08-20 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Factor xia inhibitors
WO2015123091A1 (en) 2014-02-11 2015-08-20 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Factor xia inhibitors
WO2015164308A1 (en) 2014-04-22 2015-10-29 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. FACTOR XIa INHIBITORS
WO2016015593A1 (en) 2014-07-28 2016-02-04 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. FACTOR XIa INHIBITORS
WO2016029216A3 (en) * 2014-08-22 2016-05-12 Biocryst Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method for producing amidine derivatives
US9573969B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2017-02-21 Novartis Ag Compounds and compositions as kinase inhibitors
US9809610B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2017-11-07 Novartis Ag Compounds and compositions as kinase inhibitors
US10071995B2 (en) 2014-09-24 2018-09-11 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
WO2016046156A1 (en) * 2014-09-24 2016-03-31 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
US10077265B2 (en) 2014-09-24 2018-09-18 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
WO2016046158A1 (en) * 2014-09-24 2016-03-31 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
US10494354B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-12-03 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-aryl-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10239845B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-03-26 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-aryl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10494351B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-12-03 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-aryl-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10214501B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-02-26 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-alkyl bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10494352B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-12-03 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-aryl-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US11891365B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2024-02-06 Valo Health, Inc. 3-alkyl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US11702412B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2023-07-18 Valo Health, Inc. Bicyclic [4,6,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10377726B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-08-13 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-aryl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10407418B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-09-10 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. Bicyclic [4,6,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10414738B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-09-17 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-alkyl bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10421732B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-09-24 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-alkyl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US11279681B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2022-03-22 Valo Health, Inc. 3-alkyl bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10421731B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-09-24 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-alkyl bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10428031B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-10-01 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-alkyl bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10442776B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-10-15 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-alkyl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10501424B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-12-10 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-aryl-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10450284B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-10-22 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-aryl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10457652B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-10-29 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-alkyl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10464909B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-11-05 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-alkyl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10464910B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-11-05 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-alkyl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10472337B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-11-12 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-aryl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10479772B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-11-19 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-aryl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10494353B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-12-03 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-aryl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10183934B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-01-22 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. Bicyclic [4,6,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10214500B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-02-26 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-alkyl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US11274085B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2022-03-15 Valo Health, Inc. 3-aryl-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10450283B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-10-22 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-alkyl bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10513501B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2019-12-24 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-alkyl bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US11274084B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2022-03-15 Valo Health, Inc. 3-aryl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10988450B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2021-04-27 Valo Early Discovery, Inc. 3-alkyl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10870645B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2020-12-22 Valo Early Discovery, Inc. Bicyclic [4,6,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10829461B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2020-11-10 Valo Early Discovery, Inc. 3-aryl-4-amido-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10112915B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2018-10-30 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 3-aryl bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10829462B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2020-11-10 Valo Early Discovery, Inc. 3-alkyl bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US10822316B2 (en) 2015-02-02 2020-11-03 Valo Early Discovery, Inc. 3-aryl-bicyclic [4,5,0] hydroxamic acids as HDAC inhibitors
US11180471B2 (en) 2015-07-09 2021-11-23 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
US10421742B2 (en) 2015-07-09 2019-09-24 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Substituted oxopyridine derivatives
WO2017074832A1 (en) 2015-10-29 2017-05-04 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. FACTOR XIa INHIBITORS
WO2017074833A1 (en) 2015-10-29 2017-05-04 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Macrocyclic spirocarbamate derivatives as factor xia inhibitors, pharmaceutically acceptable compositions and their use
US10751351B2 (en) 2016-02-26 2020-08-25 Debiopharm International S.A. Medicament for treatment of diabetic foot infections
US10626092B2 (en) 2016-05-02 2020-04-21 Mei Pharma, Inc. Polymorphic forms of 3-[(2-butyl-1-(2-diethylamino-ethyl)-1H-benzoimidazol-5-yl]-N-hydroxy-acrylamide and uses thereof
US11730721B2 (en) 2016-06-17 2023-08-22 Valo Health, Inc. 2-spiro-5- and 6-hydroxamic acid indanes as HDAC inhibitors
US10555935B2 (en) 2016-06-17 2020-02-11 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. 2-spiro-5- and 6-hydroxamic acid indanes as HDAC inhibitors
US10874649B2 (en) 2016-06-17 2020-12-29 Valo Early Discovery, Inc. 2-spiro-5- and 6-hydroxamic acid indanes as HDAC inhibitors
WO2018039094A1 (en) 2016-08-22 2018-03-01 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Pyridine-1-oxide derivatives and their use as factor xia inhibitors
US12011449B2 (en) 2016-09-19 2024-06-18 Novartis Ag Therapeutic combinations comprising a c-RAF inhibitor
US12036227B2 (en) 2017-05-02 2024-07-16 Novartis Ag Combination therapy
US11603351B2 (en) 2017-07-11 2023-03-14 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Carboxamides as modulators of sodium channels
US10647661B2 (en) 2017-07-11 2020-05-12 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Carboxamides as modulators of sodium channels
CN109879808A (en) * 2019-03-05 2019-06-14 北京工业大学 One kind chalcones derivative of base containing five-membered azole heterocycle and preparation method and medical usage

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CA2428191A1 (en) 2002-05-30
HUP0400651A2 (en) 2004-06-28
EP1332131A2 (en) 2003-08-06
AU2002227269A1 (en) 2002-06-03
WO2002042273A3 (en) 2002-08-29
US20030166685A1 (en) 2003-09-04
JP2004514669A (en) 2004-05-20
US6642252B2 (en) 2003-11-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6642252B2 (en) Acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors
US6713467B2 (en) Acid derivatives useful as serine protease inhibitors
TWI586651B (en) Substituted tetrahydroisoquinoline compounds as factor xia inhibitors
JP2739776B2 (en) Antithrombotic amidinophenylalanine and amidinopyridylalanine derivatives
JP2846963B2 (en) Antithrombotic amidinotetrahydropyridylalanine derivative
EA001280B1 (en) Substituted n-[(aminoiminomethyl or aminomethyl)phenyl]propyl amides
JP2017525744A (en) Diamide macrocycle which is an FXIA inhibitor
US20060173057A1 (en) Methods of treating factor VIIa-associated conditions with compounds having an amine nucleus
JP2009511516A (en) Imidazole derivatives as inhibitors of TAFIa
CZ20031554A3 (en) Guanidine and amidine derivatives functioning as XA factor inhibitors
CZ301855B6 (en) N-guanidinoalkylamides, process of their preparation, use and pharmaceutical mixtures in which they are comprised
US7144895B2 (en) Benzene acetamide compounds useful as serine protease inhibitors
US9657006B2 (en) Macrocyclic factor VIIa inhibitors
WO2005030706A1 (en) Amide type carboxamide derivative
JP2001514257A (en) Protease inhibitor
US6846838B2 (en) Ureido-substituted aniline compounds useful as serine protease inhibitors
CN110759901A (en) Tetrahydroisoquinoline derivatives, and preparation method and application thereof
EA008688B1 (en) New 4-oxo-4,6,7,8,-tetrahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]pyrazine-6-carboxamide compounds, a process for their preparation and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
CZ2003452A3 (en) Data processing system, with an Internet connection facility has a structured program loaded in memory for use in assigning predetermined data from a multiplicity of data to hierarchical memory addresses
JPH0672867A (en) Antilipemic agent

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PH PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2002227269

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2002544409

Country of ref document: JP

Ref document number: 2428191

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2001996145

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2001996145

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 2001996145

Country of ref document: EP